r®
Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
r
Owner’s Manual
Thank you for choosing a Roland DisCover 5 Realtime Orchestrator, the perfect Standard MIDI File player for per-
forming musicians with a professional Vocal Harmonizer function. The DisCover 5 allows you to play back Standard
MIDI Files on SmartMedia™ card or floppy disk, and to change their orchestration in realtime, while you also have
the flexibility to jump to four locations within every song, which allows you, for instance, to repeat any part of a
song time and again.
The DisCover 5’s Vocal Harmonizer is equally flexible: it can add harmonies to your singing based on the chords used
by the songs you are playing back. You can also use it for gender transformations of your voice, for correcting not-
so-perfect singing, and for a number of professional effects.
To get the most out of the DisCover 5 and to ensure many years of trouble-free service, we urge you to read
through this Owner’s Manual thoroughly.
To avoid confusion, let’s agree to use the word “button” for all keys on the front panel, and use “key” only when
referring to the DisCover 5’s keyboard.
To save space (and time), let us agree to use the word “song” when referring to Standard MIDI Files.
Before using this instrument, carefully read the sections entitled “Important Safety Instructions” and “Important
notes”. They provide important information concerning the proper operation of the DisCover 5. Be sure to keep this
manual in a safe place for future reference.
Copyright © 2002 ROLAND EUROPE. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Roland Europe s.p.a.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features
Features
This implies, of course, that you can connect an
optional (Roland DR-10 or DR-20) microphone to the
DisCover 5. Other signal sources (synthesizers, etc.)
can also be connected.
The ease of Standard MIDI Files
Based on a thorough analysis of how most perform-
ing musicians work, Roland found that Standard
MIDI Files were the most popular accompaniment
(even on arranger-based keyboards), and so decided
to design an instrument that takes mere playback
one giant leap further.
The signals generated by your singing and/or the
Vocal Harmonizer can either be added to the signals
of the OUTPUT sockets, or transmitted directly to one
or two mixer channels (or additional amplifiers) via
the dedicated VOCAL HARMONIZER OUTPUT sockets.
The DisCover 5 is not just another Standard MIDI File
player with a keyboard: it’s a MIDI File wizard that
allows you to do all kinds of things to song material
you purchase or download from the Internet.
Dedicated effects sections
The DisCover 5 has dedicated (and completely sepa-
rate) effects processors for the song and Keyboard
parts, on the one hand, and the microphone and
Vocal Harmonizer signals on the other.
The DisCover 5 accepts 8MB, 16MB, 32MB, 64MB,
and 128MB SmartMedia™ cards. You should there-
fore be able to build yourself a vast repertoire in no
time.
These include: Reverb, Chorus, Delay, Compressor,
Gate, and 2-band parametric equalizer.
Flexible song playback
Simply by selecting another “Cover” preset (of which
there are 72), you can change the orchestration of
the songs you are playing back, so as to transform,
say, the original country version into a Viennese ball-
room rendition.
Three Keyboard parts
Of course, you can also play on the DisCover 5’s key-
board. To this end, your Realtime Orchestrator con-
tain an Upper, Lower, and M.Drums part. Upper and
Lower can be played together (“layered”) or via sepa-
rate keyboard areas (“Split”), whose split point is
adjustable.
It is also possible to just change the character of the
drum or bass parts, if you feel your songs will sound
better that way.
Of course, you can also program everything yourself
so as to add your hallmark to pre-recorded material.
The good news is that all changes can be carried out
on the DisCover 5 itself. You do not need to resort to
an external sequencer or software program.
Intuitive user interface
The large touch screen keeps you posted about the
DisCover 5’s status and allows you to set almost all
functions by touching the on-screen fields.
The DisCover 5’s panel layout is just as intuitive and
very cooperative indeed: it works hand-in-hand with
the touch screen.
Song Chain function and quick location of the songs
you need
Thanks to the DisCover 5’s Chain function, you can
program play lists for your performances. The advan-
tage of such song chains is that you won’t have to
look for the desired songs on stage.
D-Beam controller
The DisCover 5 has the acclaimed D-Beam Controller*
for intuitive song playback control and additional DJ-
like effects via movements over an invisible beam of
infrared light. And, of course, the BENDER/MODULA-
TION lever is also there, as are sockets for optional
footswitches and an expression pedal.
But make no mistake: in the DisCover 5’s case, not
having to look for the next song to be played back is
only designed to help you avoid choosing the wrong
song, which can happen quite easily, as you may
know. Realtime selection of Standard MIDI Files is
indeed lightning-fast (courtesy of the Song Finder)
and convenient (Play & Search function).
(* D Beam technology licensed from Interactive Light, Inc.)
Excellent sound source
The DisCover 5 comes with a 64-voice polyphonic
sound source with 1,422 instrument sounds and 44
Drum Sets that cover everything from incredibly
realistic acoustic instruments to cooking Techno
sounds. Never before has an electronic instrument
produced such true-to-life instrument and drum
sounds that include subtle tonal changes and all the
“noises” associated with acoustic instruments (scrap-
ing for guitar sounds, resonance for drum sounds,
etc.).
Furthermore, you can already prepare the next song
while the current one is still running (NEXT SONG
function).
And finally, you can also link one song to each User
Program, so that the desired song will be loaded sim-
ply by recalling that User Program.
Professional Vocal Harmonizer
Another highlight of the DisCover 5 is its Vocal Har-
monizer that adds automatic harmonies to your
singing, while there are also several modes for trans-
forming your (or someone else’s) voice.
The DisCover 5 supports GS-, General MIDI2-, and
XG-format MIDI files.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
128 User Programs
…and so much more
User Programs are memories where you can save
your own panel settings. These include the currently
selected song, Tones (sounds), tempo, as well as a lot
of other parameters. At the press of a maximum of
three buttons, you can thus completely reconfigure
your instrument.
Listing all of the DisCover 5’s advantages and func-
tions would take another ten pages, while you must
be dying to put it through its paces. That is why we
would like to ask you to read this manual from cover
to cover. You’ll find that the DisCover 5 is quite
unlike any other instrument you know.
For even more flexibility, User Program settings
stored on SmartMedia™ card can be loaded directly,
so that the number of “pre-sets” available on stage is
almost unlimited.
Have fun!
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the unit safely
Using the unit safely
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
The G symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor
place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord,
producing severed elements and short circuits. Damaged
cords are fire and shock hazards!
• Before using this instrument, make sure to read the
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
....................................................................................................................................
• Do not open or perform any internal modifications on
the unit.
...................................................................................................................................
• This instrument, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of
producing sound levels that could cause permanent
hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a
high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If
you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears,
you should immediately stop using the unit, and consult
an audiologist.
....................................................................................................................................
• Do not attempt to repair the DisCover 5, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides specific
instructions directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an
authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Informa-
tion” page.
...................................................................................................................................
• Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins,
pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc.) to
penetrate the unit.
....................................................................................................................................
• Never use or store the DisCover 5 in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight
in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of
heat-generating equipment); or are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are
• Humid; or are
...................................................................................................................................
• In households with small children, an adult should pro-
vide supervision until the child is capable of following all
rules essential for the safe operation of the DisCover 5.
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
...................................................................................................................................
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
....................................................................................................................................
• This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that
is recommended by Roland.
...................................................................................................................................
• Do not force the DisCover 5’s power cord to share an
outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be
especially careful when using extension cords—the total
power used by all devices you have connected to the
extension cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rat-
ing (watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and
eventually melt through.
....................................................................................................................................
007
• Make sure you always have the unit placed in such a way
that it is level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
....................................................................................................................................
• The instrument should only be connected to a power
supply of the type described in the operating instruc-
tions, or as marked on the DisCover 5.
...................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
• Before using the DisCover 5 in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or
an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Infor-
mation” page.
....................................................................................................................................
• The DisCover 5 should be located so that its location or
position does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
....................................................................................................................................
• This unit for use only with Roland keyboard stand KS-12.
Use with other stands is capable of resulting in instability
causing possible injury.
....................................................................................................................................
• Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord
when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this
unit.
....................................................................................................................................
• Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entan-
gled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed out of
the reach of children.
....................................................................................................................................
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the
unit.
....................................................................................................................................
• Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands
when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this
unit.
....................................................................................................................................
• If you need to move the instrument, take note of the pre-
cautions listed below. Make sure to have a firm grip, to
protect yourself from injury and the instrument from
damage.
• Disconnect the power cord.
• Disconnect all cords coming from external devices.
• Remove the music stand.
....................................................................................................................................
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug
the power cord from the outlet.
....................................................................................................................................
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your
area, disconnect the power cord from the outlet.
....................................................................................................................................
• Should you remove screws, make sure to put them in a
safe place out of children’s reach, so there is no chance
of them being swallowed accidentally.
....................................................................................................................................
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important notes
1. Important notes
In addition to the items listed under “Using the unit safely” (p. 4), please read and observe the following:
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the instrument’s
Power supply
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so
you do not need to be concerned about those around you (espe-
cially late at night).
• Do not use this instrument on the same power circuit with any
device that will generate line noise (such as an electric motor or
variable lighting system).
• When you need to transport the instrument, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in. Otherwise, you will need to use
equivalent packaging materials, or a flightcase.
• Before connecting the DisCover 5 to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or dam-
age to speakers or other devices.
• Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5, EV-7; sold sepa-
rately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk caus-
ing malfunction and/or damage to the DisCover 5.
Placement
• Using the DisCover 5 near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To allevi-
ate the problem, change the orientation of this instrument or
move it further away from the source of interference.
About the touch screen
• Wipe off stains on the touch screen using ethanol, but do not
allow the ethanol to soak into the joint of the upper fume and the
bottom glass, for it may otherwise cause peeling or malfunction.
Do not use organic solvents or detergents other than ethyl alcohol
(ethanol).
• This instrument may interfere with radio and television reception.
Do not use it in the vicinity of such receivers.
• Observe the following when using the unit’s floppy disk drive. For
further details, refer to “Before using floppy disks (handling the
floppy disk drive)”.
Before using floppy disks (handling the floppy disk
drive)
• Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free from vibra-
tion. If the unit must be installed at an angle, be sure the installa-
tion does not exceed the permissible range: upward, 2°; down-
ward, 18°.
• Do not place the unit near devices that produce a strong mag-
netic field (e.g., loudspeakers).
• Install the DisCover 5 on a solid, level surface.
• Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while the drive is
operating.
• Do not expose the DisCover 5 to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or
otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can
deform or discolor the instrument.
• Avoid using the DisCover 5 immediately after it has been moved to
a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its
former location. Rapid changes in the environment can cause con-
densation to form inside the drive, which will adversely affect the
operation of the drive and/or damage floppy disks. When the unit
has been moved, allow it to become accustomed to the new envi-
ronment (allow a few hours) before operating it.
• To avoid possible breakdown, do not use the unit in a wet area,
such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture.
• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can be
the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce sound.
• To insert a disk, push it gently but firmly into the drive—it will click
into place. To remove a disk, press the EJECT button firmly. Do not
use excessive force to remove a disk which is lodged in the drive.
Maintenance
• For everyday cleaning wipe the DisCover 5 with a soft, dry cloth or
one that has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stub-
born dirt, use a mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure
to wipe the instrument thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
• Never attempt to remove a floppy disk from the drive while the
drive is operating (the indicator is lit); damage could result to both
the disk and the drive.
• Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or down.
• Never use benzene, thinner, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to
avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.
• To prevent damage to the disk drive’s heads, always try to hold the
floppy disk in a level position (not tilted in any direction) while
inserting it into the drive. Push it in firmly, but gently. Never use
excessive force.
Repairs and data
• Please be aware that all data contained in the instrument’s mem-
ory may be lost when it is sent for repairs. In certain cases (such as
when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order), we regret
that it may not be possible to restore the data. Roland assumes no
liability concerning such loss of data.
• To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert only floppy
disks into the disk drive. Never insert any other type of disk. Avoid
getting paper clips, coins, or any other foreign objects inside the
drive.
Handling floppy disks
Additional precautions
• Please be aware that the memory contents can be irretrievably lost
as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the
instrument.
• Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin magnetic coating.
Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large
amounts of data on such a small surface area. To preserve their
integrity, please observe the following when handling floppy disks:
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the instrument’s but-
tons, other controls, and jacks/connectors. Rough handling can
lead to malfunctions.
• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
• Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.
• Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended temperature
range: 10°~50°C (50°~122°F).
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
• When connecting/disconnecting cables, grasp the connector
itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing
shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal elements.
• Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as
those generated by loudspeakers.
• A small amount of heat will radiate from the instrument during
normal operation. This is perfectly normal.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
• Floppy disks have a “WRITE” tab which can protect the disk from
accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be kept in
the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position only
when you wish to write new data onto the disk.
Liability and copyright
• Should data contained and stored on the SmartMedia card be lost,
it is unfortunately impossible to restore them. Roland Europe
S.p.A. assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.
Rear side of the disk
• Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public perfor-
mance, broadcasting, or the like in whole or in part, of a work
(musical composition, video, broadcast, public performance, or the
like) whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law.
WRITE
(you can save data to the disk)
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copy-
right held by a third party. Roland assumes no responsibility what-
soever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights
arising through your use of this unit.
Protect tab
PROTECT
(you cannot save data)
• Disks containing important performance data for this instru-
ment should always be locked (have their write protect tab slid
to the PROTECT position) before you insert them into the drive
of another instrument.
• The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk. If
the label comes loose while the disk is in the drive, it may be
difficult to remove the disk.
• Put the disk back into its case for storage.
Before using a SmartMedia™ card
• Only SmartMedia cards formatted on the DisCover 5 can be used.
• Be sure to insert the memory card all the way into the slot.
• Do not touch the contacts of the memory card, or allow them to
become soiled.
• Never remove the memory card or turn off the power while an
operation –such as reading or writing data, or formatting– is being
performed on the memory card. Never remove or connect the card
while the DisCover 5 is on. Doing so can destroy the data on the
memory card and/or render the memory card itself unusable.
• If you affix the write-protect label to the write-protect area of the
memory card, you will not be able to format the card or write data
to it. If you wish to format the card or write data to it, do so with-
out the label affixed. For details on the write-protect sticker, refer
to the owner’s manual for your memory card.
• If you attempt to format a card or write data to it when the write-
protect label is affixed, an error message will appear. In that case,
either insert another card or remove the write-protect label.
• At power-on, do not remove/insert a SmartMedia card while the
DisCover 5 is updating its internal data (wait until the messages
“Song database checking…” and “User Program database
checking…” have disappeared).
• Make sure that the memory card is oriented correctly, and push it
all the way into the slot. The gold contacts must face downward.
• Never turn on the power when a memory card is inserted partway
into the slot. Doing so will damage the data in internal memory.
Memory cards usable with the DisCover 5
• The DisCover 5 can use commercially available Smart Media mem-
ory cards. You can purchase such cards at a computer shop or dig-
ital camera dealer.
• Memory cards you purchase must meet the following conditions.
• Power supply voltage: 3.3 V
• SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corp.
• Capacity: 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128MB
• All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective owners.
• The DisCover 5 cannot use SmartMedia of types other than the
above.
• DisCover 5 IT. PAT. PEND.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2. Panel descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Editing the Vocal Harmonizer parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Procedure for selecting these pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Singer settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Voice-FX settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Auto Tune settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Vocoder settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Small settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Ensemble settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
3. Touring your DisCover 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Switching the DisCover 5 on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Interactive demo of the DisCover 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Playing back songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Quick location of the song you need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Starting playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Other practical playback functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Modifying songs in realtime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Using the Cover function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Minus One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Vocal Harmonizer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Adding harmonies to your singing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Who specifies the harmonies? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Not convinced so far? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Voice-FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Auto Tune. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using the Vocoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Automatic transposition (Singer Key). . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Displaying Lyrics and chord information . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using the Keyboard parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Splitting the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Drumming on the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Choosing other Tones (or Drum Sets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using the D Beam Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8. More refined song functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the Fade-In/Out function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Programming MARK JUMP locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Working with the Song Finder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Locating files with the Song Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Editing the Song Finder information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Song Chain function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Programming Song Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Editing Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Using Song Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Managing Song Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
9. Working with User Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Writing your settings to a User Program. . . . . . . . . . 80
Selecting User Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Using the numeric buttons and/or the display . . . . . . . .81
Selecting User Programs with [DOWN] [UP]. . . . . . . . . . .82
Finder: selecting User Programs on SmartMedia card . .82
Selectively loading User Program settings
(User Program Hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Automatic functions for User Programs . . . . . . . . . . 84
Linking a MIDI Set to a User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Startup User Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
10. Song Makeup Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Instrument: selecting different sounds . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Volume: part balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Reverb and Chorus: effect balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Palette: in-depth song editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4. Using the performance functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Pitch Bend and Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Transposition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Setting the transposition interval via the display . . . . . . 39
Keyboard Touch (velocity sensitivity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Master Tune. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
D Beam functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using optional footswitches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Scale Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
11. Editing Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Adding Lyrics to a song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
‘Utility’ functions for Edit Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
12. MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
The how-to’s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Editing MIDI parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Editing the System parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
MIDI Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5. Before you start editing (Menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6. Working with the Mixer & using effects. . . . . . . . 49
Mixing Keyboard parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
More refined Mixer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Editing the Keyboard (and song) effects processors. . . . 50
Using the multi-effects processor (Multi-FX) . . . . . . 52
Selecting another Multi-FX type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Linking Multi-FX type selection to the Upper part
13. Disk/Media functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
The how-to’s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Load (from disk or SmartMedia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Save (to disk or SmartMedia). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Disk/Media Utility functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Copy functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
(Upper M-FX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Voice and Vocal Harmonizer part mixing. . . . . . . . . . 54
Reverb, Delay, and Chorus effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7. Editing the Keyboard & Vocal Harmonizer parts . 59
14. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
MIDI Implementation Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Editing the Keyboard parts (Sound Edit) . . . . . . . . . . 59
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
2. Panel descriptions
A
BENDER/MODULATION lever
By performing left/right movements, you can bend
your solo notes down (left) or up (right). Press this
lever towards the rear of the DisCover 5 to add modu-
lation (usually vibrato) to the notes you are playing.
B
C
D
MASTER section
[VOLUME] knob: Use this knob to set the global vol-
ume of your DisCover 5.
[BALANCE] knob: This knob allows you to set the vol-
ume balance between the notes you play on the key-
board (KEYBOARD) and the song parts (SONG). Turn it
towards the right if you think your solo is too soft.
D Beam controller
This controller allows you to influence the timbre of
the notes you play, to control song playback, and to
create some unique effects. All you need to do is move
your hand up/down or left/right above the two “eyes”.
The buttons allow you to assign the desired function
to the D Beam Controller. See p. 37.
PLAYER section
[CHAIN] button: Press this button to access the Chain
display where you can select a song chain to be played
back, edit existing chains, program new ones, etc.
When this button lights, [|√], [º], [‰], [®/ª] are used to
control playback of the current song.
[NEXT≈SONG] button: Press this button to select the
next song you want to use, while the current one is
still running. If the [CHAIN] button lights, this button
allows you to select the next song of the selected
chain.
[MINUS≈ONE] button: Press this button to switch off
the part you want to play (or sing) yourself. The part
to be muted is selectable (page 19).
[|√], [º], [‰], [®/ª]: These buttons allow you to return to
the beginning of the current song, “rewind” or fast-
foward in one-measure steps, and to start and stop
playback of the selected song.
BEAT indicator: this indicator flashes at the speed of
the currently-set tempo (the tempo value also appears
in the display).
E
F
TRANSPOSE section
These buttons allow you to transpose the DisCover 5
up ([]) or down ([ƒ]) in semitone steps. You can also
specify which parts are to be transposed (page 38).
If neither button lights, no manual transposition is
used.
FADE OUT/IN button
This button allows you to start playback with an auto-
matic fade-in of the music. If you press it during play-
back, the volume will gradually decrease (fade-out).
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel descriptions
G
MARK JUMP buttons [1], [2], [3], [4]
R
S
VALUE dial
These buttons allow you to jump to one of four
stored locations inside the currently selected song.
The 132 songs on the supplied SmartMedia™ card
already contain such locations for the verse ([1]), cho-
rus ([2]), bridge ([3]) and ending ([4]). You can edit
these, and also program the desired locations for
songs that do not yet contain them.
This dial can be used to set the tempo or the value in
the parameter field that is currently highlighted.
PREV & NEXT buttons
The [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons are used to select the
previous or next value field on the current display
page (if available).
T
KEYBOARD PART section
H
USER PROGRAM buttons
This section contains all buttons that are related to
the music you can play on the DisCover 5’s keyboard
(i.e. the “Keyboard parts”).
These buttons allow you to select the previous
([DOWN]) or next ([UP]) User Program. User Programs
are registration memories. By pressing these buttons
simultaneously, you revert to the settings that were
in effect before recalling the current User Program
(“Cancel”).
Press the [SPLIT] button to separate the keyboard into
two halves. The left half is then assigned to the Lower
part, and the right to the Upper part (page 32).
The [M.DRUMS] button is used to activate a part that
allows you play drum and percussion solos via the
keyboard (page 32).
I
J
SONG/RHYTHM FINDER button
Press this button to quickly locate the desired Stan-
dard MIDI File on the inserted SmartMedia™ card or
floppy disk. See page 70.
The [LOWER] and [UPPER] buttons are used to switch
the Keyboards parts of the same name on and off.
Though you can play them simultaneously (if the
[SPLIT] button doesn’t light), these parts cannot be
combined with the M.DRUMS part.
LYRICS & CHORD button
Press this button if you want the lyrics contained in
the songs to appear in the display. At the same time,
the chords of the notes played by the song parts will
also be displayed. This, however, is information that is
“extracted” (derived) in realtime by the DisCover 5.
U
VOCAL HARMONIZER section
The buttons and knobs in this section are used to set
the Vocal Harmonizer function, the microphone level
and the effects applied to the signals received via the
Vocal Harmonizer MIC INPUT socket.
K
L
SINGER KEY
This button provides access to a page where you can
set and/or select the range to which the tonality of
the songs should be adapted (page 28).
V
W
TONE/USER PROGRAM section
These buttons allow you to select sounds (“Tones”) for
the Keyboard parts, or to recall the desired User Pro-
gram (registration memory).
DISK/MEDIA button
Press this button if you wish to save/load data from a
floppy disk or SmartMedia™ card. You will also find
data management functions here, like deleting files,
formatting floppies or cards, etc. (page 105).
USER PROGRAM HOLD buttons
These buttons are used for ignoring the TONE and/or
VOCAL HARMONIZER settings of subsequently loaded
User Programs. If a button lights, the DisCover 5 will
recall all User Program settings except the ones fil-
tered by the active button.
M
SONG MAKEUP TOOLS buttons
These buttons allow you to modify the settings of the
current song. See page 86.
The [COVER] button is especially interesting, because
it provides access to pre-programmed templates that
allow you to quickly modify a song’s character. See
page 19.
X
Y
SmartMedia™ slot
This is where you need to insert the supplied or other
SmartMedia cards. The DisCover 5 comes with a
64MB card packed with Standard MIDI Files and
other useful settings. You can, however, also use 4, 8,
16, 32, 64 and 128MB cards.
N
O
P
Q
TONE FINDER button
Press this button to search for a suitable sound
(“Tone”) for your live playing using the Upper and/or
Lower Keyboard parts.
Disk drive
This is where you insert floppy disks with Standard
MIDI Files you may already own. The drive accepts
2DD (720k) and 2HD (1.44MB) floppy disks.
MIXER/EFFECT button
This button provides access to the display pages
where you can set the volume balance and effects of
the DisCover 5 parts.
For your convenience, and to take advantage of the
DisCover 5’s powerful FINDER functions, we recom-
mend copying all Standard MIDI Files to SmartMedia
card.
MENU button
Press this button to call up a menu that provides
access to more in-depth DisCover 5 functions you
may wish to set from time to time.
EXIT button
Press this button to return to the previously selected
display page, or the DisCover 5’s main page.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
r
A B C
D
E F G H I J
K
L
A
HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket
GVocal Harmonizer OUTPUT R & L sockets
An optional DP-2, DP-6, or BOSS FS-5U footswitch
connected to this socket can be used for holding the
Upper-part notes. This function is also referred to as
“Sustain” or “Damper”.
If connected to a mixing console, amplifier, etc., these
sockets transmit the signal received via the MIC
INPUT socket and processed with the DisCover 5’s
Vocal Harmonizer facility. If no jacks are connected
here, the Vocal Harmonizer signals will be transmit-
ted via the OUTPUT sockets (see below).
B
C
D
FOOT SWITCH socket
An optional DP-2, DP-6, or BOSS FS-5U footswitch
connected to this socket can be used for various pur-
poses: its function is programmable (page 43).
H
VIDEO OUTPUT socket
Connect this socket to the appropriate socket of your
TV or monitor. In that case, the lyrics of songs that
contain such information, and the note information
extracted in realtime (page 29) will be displayed on
screen even if the [LYRICS&CHORD] button does not
light (in which case the lyrics and chords no longer
appear in the DisCover 5’s display).
FOOT PEDAL socket
An optional EV-5 or EV-7 expression pedal connected
to this jack can be used for controlling the volume of
the DisCover 5’s Keyboard parts.
MIDI THRU/OUT/IN sockets
These sockets allow you to connect the DisCover 5 to
external MIDI devices for a variety of applications:
receiving song data in realtime from an external
sequencer, transmitting your playing (and the data of
the song you are playing back) to an external
sequencer, using the DisCover 5 as master keyboard
in your MIDI setup, etc.
Note: The signal format (PAL or NTSC) can be set via a MENU
function.
I
OUTPUT R & L/MONO sockets
These sockets need to be connected to an external
amplifier, mixing consoles, etc. Depending on
whether you are also using the Vocal Harmonizer
OUTPUT sockets (see above), the present sockets
either transmit only the music generated by Song
and Keyboard parts, or both the tone generator’s and
Vocal Harmonizer’s signals.
Note: The MIDI functions can be accessed via the DisCover 5’s
Menu (page 99). Frequently used MIDI settings can be written
and recalled as “MIDI Sets”.
E
GAIN switch
Note: If you can/want to use only one channel on your exter-
nal amplifier, connect the L/MONO socket to its input. For opti-
mum sound quality, we recommend working in stereo, though.
If you connect a microphone to the MIC INPUT
socket, set this switch to “MIC”. If you wish to try out
the Vocal Harmonizer function for other signals (gui-
tar, external synthesizers & modules, CDs, MDs, etc.),
set this switch to “LINE”.
Note: For the “LINE” setting to work with electric guitars or
basses, you need to connect such instruments to an effects
pedal or rack effect (in bypass mode), and connect the effect’s
output to the MIC INPUT socket.
J
LCD CONTRAST knob
Use this knob to set the contrast when you are hav-
ing problems reading what is written on the display.
The LCD may take some time to warm up. That is why
you may have to change the contrast several times
after powering on.
F
MIC INPUT socket
K
L
POWER ON button
Press this button to switch the DisCover 5 on and off.
This is where you need to connect an optional micro-
phone (like a Roland DR-10 or DR-20) or other exter-
nal signal source you wish to process using the
DisCover 5’s Vocal Harmonizer facility. See also “GAIN
switch” above for setting the input sensitivity.
Note: The MIC INPUT socket is mono.
AC socket
This is where you need to connect the supplied power
cord.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
3. Touring your DisCover 5
You must be dying to try out your new DisCover 5 to see what it is capable of. We’ll get to that in a minute. But first
we need to connect it.
Connections
The DisCover 5 does not contain internal speakers. You therefore have to connect it to an external amplifier
(Roland’s KC series, for example), or use optional headphones (Roland RH-25 or RH-50, for example).
Be sure to switch off both the DisCover 5 and the external devices you want to connect before making or break-
ing audio and/or MIDI connections. If you do not have access to the sound system of the venue where you are
performing, ask the local engineer to set the volume to the minimum level.
Dynamic microphone (select “MIC”)
Other signal source (select “LINE”)
[Microphone: DR-10 or DR-20]
*Connect the microphone using an unbal-
anced mono 1/4” jack.
Keyboard amplifier,
active speakers, etc.
Keyboard amplifier, active speakers
—OPTIONAL—
Expression pedal
(EV-5, EV-7)
Connect to suitable wall outlet
Roland
Vocal Harmonizer
OUTPUT R, L,
FOOT
PEDAL
FOOT
SWITCH
HOLD
FOOTSW.
AC
OUTPUT R, L/MONO
MIC INPUT
Footswitch
(DP-2, DP-6, or
BOSS FS-5U)
Stereo headphones
(RH-25 or RH-50)
Footswitch
(DP-2, DP-6, or BOSS FS-5U)
Note: Try to use dynamic microphones whenever possible. You can also connect a condenser microphone, however, provided you
use a DI box (with power supply). Connect the microphone using an unbalanced mono 1/4” jack.
Note: Except for the power cable, all other items shown above are optional. See your Roland dealer for details.
Note: There is no absolute need to connect the Vocal Harmonizer OUTPUT sockets. If you don’t, your singing and the Harmonizer
effects will be transmitted via the main OUTPUT sockets. (Only if you don’t connect anything to the Vocal Harmonizer OUTPUT sock-
ets.) If you use these connectors, the Vocal Harmonizer signals are no longer transmitted to the headphones.
You can also connect the DisCover 5 to a mixing console, of course (see below).
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Vocal Harmonizer
OUTPUT R, L
OUTPUT R, L/MONO
Switching the DisCover 5 on/off
After connecting the DisCover 5 to the other devices, proceed as follows:
Switching on the DisCover 5
(1) Insert the included power cable into the AC inlet
and then plug it into an electrical outlet.
(2) Press the DisCover 5’s [POWER≈ON] button located
on the rear panel to switch it on.
(3) If you connected the DisCover 5 to a mixing console, switch it on now.
(4) Switch on the amplifier, your active speakers, or the keyboard amplifier(s).
(5) Use the [VOLUME] knob to set the DisCover 5’s out-
put volume.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
Setting the display contrast
The information in the LCD display may be difficult to
view after turning on your DisCover 5 or after extended
use. Your viewing angle or the current lighting conditions
can also affect the appearance of the display.
In such cases, use the [LCD≈CONTRAST] knob located on
the rear panel to adjust the contrast of the display.
Switching off the DisCover 5
(6) Switch off all external devices.
(7) Use the DisCover 5’s [POWER≈ON] button to switch it off.
LCD Mode
You can decide to have the information displayed
white-on-blue (Normal) or blue–on-white (Invert).
Choose whichever is more convenient for you:
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(2) On the display page that appears now, press the
[UTILITY] field.
(3) Press the [Global] field in the left corner.
(4) Press the [LCD≈Mode] field.
(5) Use the [VALUE] dial to select “Invert” (blue-on-
white) or “Normal” (white-on-blue).
(6) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main page.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Interactive demo of the DisCover 5
Your DisCover 5 contains an interactive demo that introduces all of its highlights. It might be a good idea to try it
out now. The demo is self-explanatory, so we’ll just show you how to start and stop it.
(1) Simultaneously press the [CHAIN] and
(2) Press the field that provides access to the
desired demo function.
[NEXT≈SONG] buttons.
There are 5 demo songs that are played back in
a loop. If necessary, you can jump to the pre-
ceding or following demo song by pressing the
[PREV] or [NEXT] button.
(3) To stop the demo and leave the DisCover 5’s
Demo function, press the [EXIT] button.
The display now looks as follows:
(4) If you can barely hear the music, set the
[VOLUME] knob (far left, MASTER section) to
a higher level.
Overview
Your DisCover 5 is a very user-friendly instrument indeed, but it is also extremely powerful. As we have to start
somewhere (which may not be what you want to do first), here’s an overview of where to find what for your first
exploration of the DisCover 5:
What do you want to do first?
• Playing back songs → p. 16
• Modifying songs in realtime → p. 19
• Vocal Harmonizer function → p. 21
• Automatic transposition (Singer Key) → p. 28
• Displaying Lyrics and chord information → p. 29
• Using the Keyboard parts → p. 31
• Using the D Beam Controller → p. 37
Other aspects will be covered later in this manual.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
Playing back songs
Your DisCover 5 is a novel Standard MIDI File player with all kinds of functions for “customizing” the songs you play
back via easy-to-use routines. Let us first look at the playback functions proper.
(1) Connect the DisCover 5 to your sound sys-
The display changes to:
tem.
If you prefer to use headphones, connect them
to the PHONES socket to the left of the key-
board.
(2) Insert the supplied SmartMedia™ card into
the card slot.
(3) Switch on the amp (if available) and the
DisCover 5.
You can press [®÷ª] at this stage to start play-
back of the first song on the card. (If no card is
inserted, while a floppy disk is in the drive, the
DisCover 5 selects the first song on disk.) To
select the song yourself, proceed as follows:
(5) If it isn’t already highlighted, press the
[SMART≈MEDIA] field in the upper right cor-
ner.
(4) Press the [SONG/RHYTHM≈FINDER] button.
The display shows a list of 6 songs (Standard
MIDI Files) on the SmartMedia card.
If you prefer to listen to one of your own songs
on floppy disk, insert it into the drive and press
the [FLOPPY] field.
(6) If the name of the song you want to listen to
is already displayed, press its line.
You can also press the [SONG] field in the upper
left corner of the display (if available) to select
songs.
In our example, “Birdland” has been selected.
(7) To display the next 6 songs, press the [˚] field
in the lower right corner.
You can press this field as many times as neces-
sary (or until it is no longer displayed).
To return to a previous group of 6 songs,
press [ø].
Quick location of the song you need
There are several ways to quickly locate the song you are after:
• Press the [Author] or [Genre] field under step (4)
to sort the song files according to artist names
(Author) or kind of music (Genre).
Continue with step (5) to select the song you
want to listen to.
The display now returns to the page shown
under step (4) above. This time, however, only
the songs belonging to the selected Index are
displayed.
Continue with step (5) to select the song you
want to listen to.
• Press the [Index] field in the upper left corner.
• If you only know the melody of the desired
song, press the [Finder] field under step (4).
Press one of the displayed field names to nar-
row down your search to songs that belong to
the selected category (“Index”).
Note: Press the [ALL] field to display all songs on the
SmartMedia card.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
• Press the [Play&Search] field.
• To enter the entire line again, press [∫≈Reset] to
erase the previously entered notes, then play
the phrase again.
• After entering the melody, press the [SEARCH]
field.
The display now returns to step (4) on page 16
and shows the names of the songs that contain
the melody you played. If no songs were found,
the following message appears, and all songs
are once again displayed:
• As indicated in the display, play the main theme
on the keyboard. You can play in any key, and
the rhythm doesn’t have to be perfect either
(this function just looks for intervals).
• If you played a wrong note, press
[Delete≈LastNote].
• Press the field of the song you want to play
back.
Starting playback
(8) To return to the main page, press [EXIT].
(9) Press the [®÷ª] button.
Playback of the selected song starts.
(10)If necessary, use the [VALUE] dial to change
the tempo.
To reset the song tempo, press the tempo field
in the display.
The “main page” is the DisCover 5’s display page
that provides a maximum of relevant informa-
tion and allows you to select (and change)
items you may need during normal operation.
(11)Use the [VOLUME] knob to set the
DisCover 5’s output volume.
It also displays the name of the selected song,
the tempo, and the current measure.
Note: The player can muster up to 76,000 events. If the
message “Too many events” is displayed, the selected
song contains more than that number and cannot be
played back.
You can also play to the music. If necessary, use
the [BALANCE] knob to set the desired balance.
Note: When playing back large SMFs at a very high
tempo, playback may suddenly stop and the message
“Song Scanning” may appear. This can be solved by
reducing the playback tempo so that the DisCover 5 has
enough time to process all MIDI data contained in the
song.
Other practical playback functions
GMARK JUMP
Use the MARK JUMP [1]~[4] buttons (below the
[®÷ª] button) to select the position you want to
jump to without stopping or delaying playback.
Songs on the supplied SmartMedia card con-
tain four locations (“markers”) you can jump to
right away. For songs that do not yet contain
them, you can program these markers yourself.
You can also edit the locations of existing
markers (page 69).
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
Such changes occur at the end of the current
measure, which makes more musical sense than
jumping when you’re halfway into a measure.
GPlayer (GS Reset Send and Quick Start)
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
The labels (VERSE, CHORUS, BRIDGE, ENDING)
refer to the locations you jump to by pressing
the corresponding button. Obviously, these
labels may be meaningless for markers you pro-
grammed or edited yourself.
The display changes to:
There are four such MARK memories.
The advantage of these markers is that you can
return to the chorus, for example, if you notice
that the audience wants the song to last a little
longer than originally planned. Markers also
allow you to change the song structure in real-
time (by starting with the bridge, for example).
Note: These buttons may also come in handy for the
songs of the [Rhythm] index. See page 70.
(2) Press the [UTILITY] field. If the [Player] field in
the left corner is not displayed in white, press
it.
GReset, rewind, fast-forward
You can also use the following buttons to jump
to different song locations.
[|√] TOP: Allows you to return to the beginning
of the current song.
[º] BWD: allows you to rewind one measure at
a time.
[‰] FWD: allows you to fast-forward one mea-
sure at a time.
(3) Switch the [GS≈RESET≈SEND] field to specify
whether (on) or not (off) SysEx messages
contained in the song you play back are
updated while you fast-forward/rewind or
use the MARK JUMP buttons.
These buttons are available both during play-
back and while playback is stopped.
GNext Song
While the current song is still running, you can
already select the next one to be played back:
(4) Use the [Quick≈Start] field to quickly jump to
the first note of the selected song.
• Press the [NEXT≈SONG] button.
This function temporarily sets the tempo to ꢀ =
250 – to race through empty measures at the
beginning of the song file (which may contain
important settings), thus avoiding that the
newly selected song begins with two measures
of “nothing” (which can be terribly long when
you’re in front of an audience). As soon as the
DisCover 5 reaches the first note, the tempo
returns to the programmed value.
• Select the desired song using the Song Finder
(page 16).
• As soon as the current song finishes, the next
one starts. You can now select another song.
• Press the [NEXT≈SONG] button again to switch
off this function.
Note: Your DisCover 5 also provides a Chain function
for programming play lists of several songs (page 76).
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Modifying songs in realtime
Let us now look at some functions for customizing the songs you play back.
Using the Cover function
The COVER function provides “masks” that change the instrumentation of the selected song. Simply by selecting
another preset, you can cause a Viennese waltz to be played back by a heavy metal band, etc. Even though the
arrangement (rhythm, riffs) does not change, the songs’ character can be modified beyond recognition.
(1) Press the [COVER] button.
Press the [DRUM] field if only the drum and
percussion instruments should change.
Press the [BASS] field if you’re happy with
everything but the bass line’s sound.
(3) Press one of the six fields in the lower half of
the display to select another preset.
After selecting a preset, you can press
[Original≈Sounds] (page 1) to return to the origi-
nal orchestration.
The display now looks more or less as follows:
(4) If none of the displayed presets appeal to
you, use the PAGE [1]~[5] fields at the right to
jump to another page with more presets.
(5) Try out various presets to see how (fast) this
concept works.
(6) If you like the new version better than the
original one, you can press the [SAVE] field to
save the song to SmartMedia card or floppy
with this information (page 107).
Note: The COVER information is part of the data only
the DisCover 5 understands. You can still play back the
newly saved version of this song on another sequencer
or SMF player, but the COVER information will be
ignored.
(2) Select the parts whose instrumentation you
want to change:
Press the [ALL] field if all instruments should be
replaced.
Minus One
“Minus One” means that (at least) one part of a song is not played back.
There are at least two applications for this function:
(2) Press one of the three “preset” fields to mute
the corresponding song parts:
Press [MELODY] to mute the melody (you will
notice that the [4] field also lights).
• it allows you to play the muted parts yourself,
on the keyboard;
• it allows you to sing without doubling by the
song (which may sound odd).
Press the [ACCOMP] field to mute everything
but the melody, bass, and drums.
(1) Press and hold the [MINUS≈ONE] button.
Press the [DRUM&BASS] field to mute the bass
and drum parts.
Note: Even the “preset” fields can be used simulta-
neously. And the part fields [1]~[16] can be added, too.
(3) To mute other parts “ad lib” (i.e. without tak-
ing advantage of the presets):
• Press the [USER] field. This mutes all parts
except [4] (the melody).
The display changes to:
• Switch on all parts you want to hear by press-
ing the [1]~[3] and [5]~[16] fields. Indicator icons
of parts you need must be white (the others
blue).
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
• To save this customized “Minus” setting in the
DisCover 5’s internal memory, press [Customize].
The display now respond with:
(4) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
Your last preset selection (MELODY~USER) will
be used until you select another preset or until
you switch off your DisCover 5.
(5) Press [MINUS≈ONE] again to switch this func-
tion off.
Note: You can also switch the Minus One function on/
off using an optional footswitch (page 43).
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Vocal Harmonizer function
The Vocal Harmonizer is another major highlight of your DisCover 5. In fact, it doesn’t just produce harmonies: it
can also transform your voice in various ways. More importantly, its sound quality surpasses by far anything you
may already have tried.
Setting up
Here’s what you need to do to take advantage of
the Vocal Harmonizer function:
(6) Press the [SINGER] button (it must light) and
switch off the [VOCODER], [SMALL] or
[ENSEMBLE] button.
(1) Switch off your amp and the DisCover 5 (in
that order).
(2) Connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC
INPUT jack on the DisCover 5’s rear panel.
(7) Sing into the microphone and gradually
increase the [MIC≈GAIN] setting.
Set it to the highest possible value, taking care
to avoid that the OVER indicator lights. It would
be best to sing at the level you will be using
during your performances.
Set to “MIC”
Examples: Roland DR-10 or DR-20
(3) Set the [GAIN] switch to “MIC”.
You can also connect the (mono) output of
other instruments, a CD player, etc.
(8) If your singing is inaudible in the speakers
connected to the amp (or the headphones),
turn the [VOICE] knob towards the right
In that case, you need to set [GAIN] to “LINE”.
(towards “MAX”).
Note: If a howling sound (a.k.a. “feedback”) is produced,
your microphone may be pointed at a speaker. Try to
orient it differently, or slightly reduce the [VOICE] set-
ting.
(9) Use the [EFFECTS] knob to set the balance
between your original singing and the effects
Set to “LINE”
that are added to your voice.
Note: You can start song playback and sing to it. See
“Playing back songs” (p. 16) and “Minus One” (p. 19) for
details.
L/MONO
S
P
L
I
T
D
U
A
L
X
-D
U
A
L
ON
/
O
F
F
P
A
L
E
TT
E
T
R
A
N
S
P
O
S
E
E
D
I
T
U
T
I
L
I
TY
S
E
Q
CTRL
/
S
ELECT
COMBINATION
ALETTE
2
VOLUME
P
1
KEYBOARD MODE
ARPEGGIO
1
E
X
I
T
CANCEL
1>Piano
Preset:001
1
P
A
R
T
PERFORM
TONE
TONE
AR I
/
2
3
4
5
0
V
I
A
T
ON
LOWER
U
P
P
E
R
V
I
B
R
A
T
O
F
I
L
T
E
R
E
N
V
E
L
O
P
E
D
R
U
M
TONE
V
A
L
U
E
USER
PRESET
/
6
7
8
9
E
N
T
E
R
EDIT
P
ERFORM
ROM
P
L
A
Y
L
E
V
E
L
/
P
A
N
M
I
D
I
/
T
U
N
E
K
E
Y
B
O
A
R
D
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
ARPEGGIO
/
SYST
EM
/
EFFECT
®
Compressor, Gate, and effects
Synthesizer, CD/MD player, etc.
Your DisCover 5 provides a Compressor effect
you might want to set up now. The Compressor
reduces volume peaks and thus “levels out” dif-
ferences in the microphone signal.
(4) Set the [MIC≈GAIN] knob on the front panel to
“MIN”.
The Gate effect, on the other hand can be used
to avoid that background noises cause the
Vocal Harmonizer, etc., to start working even
though you are not singing.
These two effects are located immediately
behind the MIC INPUT socket and thus applied
to the microphone signal before it is processed
by the Vocal Harmonizer section.
Note: If you like, you can connect the Vocal Harmonizer
OUTPUT sockets to another amp (or additional mixer
channels).
(5) Switch on the DisCover 5 and your amp (in
that order).
(10)Press the [MIXER/EFFECT] button.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
The display changes to:
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
It is very important that you keep singing
while setting the following parameters.
Sustain Level: Use this parameter to specify
how fast the compressor stops working once
the microphone level drops below the Com-
pressor’s threshold. This should be set in such a
way as to avoid unpleasant level jumps
between notes. Set it in combination with the
following parameter to obtain the best possible
result.
(11)Press the [Vocal≈Effect] field.
Output Level: The Compressor reduces the
dynamics (level differences) of your singing.
This parameter serves two purposes: it allows
you to specify how strongly your voice should
be compressed, and –as you increase the value–
it raises the compressor’s output volume to
make up for the lower resulting level.
Note: The value “0” means that the Compressor is not
working.
Threshold: This parameter allows you to set
the level the microphone signal must have in
order to be audible. Softer signals will be muted
(suppressed) by the Gate.
Note: Since you pressed the [SINGER] button in step (6)
above, the left-most column is called “SINGER” here. It
may also be called “TALK”, “VOICE-FX”, or “AUTO TUNE”.
Though that is of little importance for what we are
about to do, it proves that your DisCover 5 is in fact a
very clever instrument helps you save time.
(15)Press the [Vocal≈HARMONIZER] field to jump
to a page where you can select different pre-
sets, etc. (see below).
(16)Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
(12)If you need the Compressor, press the
[Compressor] field, so that its indicator icon is
highlighted.
page.
(13)If you also want to use the Gate, press the
[GATE] field (its indicator icon must be high-
lighted).
(14)Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Adding harmonies to your singing
Now that your microphone is up and running, let’s look at the Harmonizer effect proper.
The DisCover 5 provides two harmony types: “Small”
(1 or 2 additional voices) and “Ensemble” (3 or 4
additional voices).
(5) To try out different harmonizations, press
and hold the [SMALL] button.
The display changes to:
(1) Connect your microphone, press the [SINGER]
button, set the desired [VOICE] level, and…
(2) …press the [SMALL] button (it must light).
(3) Sing a few notes and listen to the harmonies
produced.
(4) If the harmonies are too soft, turn the
[HARMONY] knob towards the right (towards
“MAX”).
(6) Press the [Male], [Female] or [Mix] field to
change the “GENDER” (voice type) of the har-
monies produced.
[Mix] adds both a male and a female voice.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
This also changes the available preset options in
the center of the display. If, on the above page,
you press [Mix] for example, the display changes
to:
The display changes to:
You already know what the [Male], [Female], and
[Mix] fields are for. The 10 preset fields in the
middle allow you to select different “voicings”
and voice characters for your choir.
(7) Press one of the preset fields ([Walkin’Vox],
for example) to select a different harmony
type.
(10)To sing again without automatic harmonies,
press the [SMALL] or [ENSEMBLE] button again
(8) Now press the [ENSEMBLE] button and sing
again.
(so that neither of them lights).
Note: Obviously, you do not have to use a song as back-
ing: you can also play the accompaniment yourself. See
page 31 and below.
This sounds more like a choir, don’t you agree?
(9) Press and hold the [ENSEMBLE] button.
Who specifies the harmonies?
Now that you know what the Vocal Harmonizer does, let us briefly look at how it does that.
You may have noticed the [Harmony≈Assign]
field in the lower left corner of the above dis-
play pages.
Use the [VALUE] dial to select another setting.
The possibilities are:
Keyboard Only notes played on the keyboard will
(all)
be used for specifying harmony pitches.
Keyboard Only notes played to the left of the split
Left
point (page 32) will be used for specify-
ing harmony pitches.
Its current (default) setting is “Auto”. This
means that, during song playback, the note
information contained in the song data will be
used for specifying the pitches of the harmony
notes (“Auto Harmony”).
Note: If the song you are playing back contains a “Har-
mony track”, the harmonies will be based on those
notes. In all other cases, the harmonies are generated in
realtime.
Keyboard Only notes played to the right of the
Right
split point (page 32) will be used for
specifying harmony pitches.
Song
The note information contained in the
song you are playing back is used.
If you stop song playback and play chords on
the keyboard, the note information thus gener-
ated is used for the harmony pitches.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
Not convinced so far?
Just in case you are a little bit disappointed by the Vocal Harmonizer function, here are some tips (and a bonus):
GUse it with song backing
(4) Press the [Edit] field.
The Harmonizer sounds most convincing when
used during song playback. Please bear in mind
that transforming your voice in realtime
requires quite a few calculations and that the
human voice is one of the most difficult “signal
sources” to recreate with varying pitches. The
Vocal Harmonizer was fine-tuned to blend in
with Standard MIDI File playback, and that’s
when it sounds most “real”. Try it out, it works!
GCheck the following (Gender Voice Input)
(1) Press and hold the [SINGER] button.
(5) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
The display changes to:
The [Vibrato] indicator icon must be blue for the
effect to be noticeable.
Here’s what the parameters mean:
Rate: Sets the speed of the vibrato effect.
Depth: Allows you to set the vibrato intensity.
Vibrato is an effect that changes (“modulates”)
the pitch. The higher the Depth value, the more
outspoken these periodic pitch changes will be.
(2) Press the [Male] field if you’re a man, or the
[Female] field if you’re a woman.
Rise Time: Allows you to set a swell for the
vibrato effect. This parameter specifies how
long it takes before the Depth value is reached
– once the Delay Time is up.
This is an important clue for the Vocal Harmo-
nizer. After selecting the correct setting, you
may find that the harmonies sound better.
And just in case, you wanted to sound like a
somewhat worn-out opera singer…
Delay Time: Allows you to set a delay between
the moment you start singing and the moment
the vibrato effect kicks in.
(3) Press the [Vibrato] field (indicator icon must
“light”).
(6) Press [EXIT] to leave this page (or
[Back≈to≈Singer] to try out the other “Gender”
settings).
Sing a few notes and note the vibrato. If the
effect is not strong enough…
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Voice-FX
Ever wondered what your voice would sound like if you were a woman (for men), man (for women), robot or
something else…? You’re about to find out:
(1) Press the [VOICE-FX] button.
(3) Press and hold the [VOICE-FX] button. The dis-
play now looks as follows:
(2) Sing into the microphone and listen to your-
self. (You may have to switch off the [SMALL]
or [ENSEMBLE] button if it lights to hear how
this function works.)
(4) Press one of the twelve preset fields in the
center of the display to try out other possibil-
ities.
Auto Tune
Here’s another interesting effect that can either be used as gimmick or to ensure that even the flattest of rendi-
tions suddenly sounds in tune. Of course, the voice will sound somewhat “artificial”, because the emphasis is on
tuning here. However, even if you just speak the words of a song, it will be sung just the same.
(1) Press the [AUTO≈TUNE] button.
If you want to play the melody yourself, press
the [Left] or [Right] field (or both) and play the
desired notes, while you speak (or sing) into the
microphone.
Note: Selecting “Left” and/or “Right” will set the Track
parameter to “Off”.
Use the Octave parameter to shift the pitch of
the Auto Tune notes up to 2 octaves up or
down.
(2) Start song playback and say something into
the microphone (don’t sing).
(5) Press the [Vibrato] field to add some “wobble”
to the Auto Tune sound.
Sounds like a very popular effect, doesn’t it?
(3) Press and hold the [AUTO≈TUNE] button.
This vibrato effect is not linked to the Voice-FX
vibrato, and can thus be set separately (see
below).
The display changes to:
(6) For more refined control over the Auto Tune
voice, press the [Edit] field:
Let us begin with the most important parame-
ter: the notes that will be used by the Auto
Tune. That is what you specify via the Auto
Tune Assign fields.
Though they are not linked to their namesakes
on the Voice-FX Edit page, most parameters on
this page will look familiar. Therefore, please
see above for the explanations of Gender and
Vibrato Rate, Depth, Rise Time, and Delay
Time.
(4) Set the Track value to select a song part.
The “4” setting usually corresponds to the mel-
ody part, and is thus the most likely candidate,
but feel free to select “1”~”3” or “5”~”16” to use
another part as melody.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
(7) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
[Portamento Time= 0] “Rough” pitch changes in semitone
steps (normal)
(8) Press the [Portamento] field to switch on this
effect.
“Portamento” means that the pitch doesn’t
change in clearly defined steps: it produces
glides from one note to the next.
[Portamento Time= 1~127] Pitch glides from one
note to the next
Use the Portamento Time parameter to specify
the speed at which those glides are carried out
(0~127). The higher the value, the slower the
transitions.
Note: To keep your settings, you must write them to a
User Program.
(9) Press [EXIT] to leave this page (or
[Back≈to≈A-Tune] to modify other Auto Tune
settings).
Using the Vocoder
A Vocoder is an effect that combines spoken words with sounds, thus creating the impression that the instru-
ment that produces the sounds can talk. As this relies on complex filtering effects, the character of the sound
used as “carrier” can change dramatically.
(1) Press the [VOCODER] button (it must light).
Again, there are several parameters for custom-
izing the Vocoder’s behavior:
(4) Press and hold the [VOCODER] button.
The display changes to:
This switches off the [SMALL] or [ENSEMBLE]
button if it was on, because the Vocoder cannot
be used simultaneously with the Harmonizer
function proper.
(2) Stop song playback if it is running.
The Vocoder can also use a song part, but for
this demonstration, we’ll use the keyboard,
because doing so will make you understand
how the Vocoder works.
Gender: Allows you to change the timbre of
the effect so as to create a masculine, feminine,
or mixed character. The Gender choice deter-
mines which 8 preset settings are available.
There are thus 24 Vocoder presets (8 for “Male”,
8 for “Female”, and 8 for “Mix”).
(3) Play a chord on the keyboard, hold those
notes, and talk into the microphone.
For obvious reasons, the Vocoder only works if
you (a) talk or sing, and (b) if there is a “musical
sound” that can be processed.
Play various chords and listen to how that
affects the signal generated by the Vocoder.
Note: The Vocoder can produce four voices at once.
Playing more than four notes simultaneously is thus
unnecessary.
Note: The Vocoder can be used alongside [SINGER],
[VOICE–FX] or [AUTO≈TUNE].
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
The 8 fields in the middle (e.g. [Opera],
[My≈Voice], etc.) specify the voice character.
These presets are based on the parameters you
can change on the Edit Part 1~4 page (which
you don’t need if you are happy with one of the
presets).
If you stop song playback and then play a chord
on the keyboard, the note information thus
generated is used.
Set the Track value to select a song part (“1”~
”16”). As the melody is usually monophonic (1
note at a time), “4” may not be the best possible
setting. Try to select a track with several notes.
(5) Set the desired “Track” value with the [VALUE]
dial.
If you want to play the melody yourself, press
the [Left] or [Right] field (or both) and play the
desired notes, while you speak (or sing) into the
microphone.
The Vocoder Assign section’s current (default)
setting is “Auto”. This means that song files
indicated as “With MIDI Harmony for Your
Vocal Harmony Processor” (with harmony note
information on track 5) automatically switch on
the Vocoder. If you like, you can still add addi-
tional chord information by playing on the key-
board. In Small or Ensemble mode, the pitch of
your singing also influences the voicing of the
harmony notes. This is not the case when you
use the Vocoder.
Note: See page 64 for the [Edit] parameters.
Note: To keep your settings, you must write them to a
User Program.
(6) Press [EXIT] or [Back≈to≈Vocoder] to leave this
page.
Talk
The Talk function is meant for announcements between songs: it switches off any other Vocal Harmonizer effect
(Voice-FX, Auto Tune, Singer, Vocoder, Small/Ensemble) that may be on. Furthermore, it mutes the Vocal Harmo-
nizer’s effects processors (Reverb, Chorus, Delay, etc.) – or adds a pinch of Reverb and/or Delay if you like.
That way, your voice has its normal sound when you
wish or need to address your audience. And here
too, the professionalism of your DisCover 5 shows,
because the Talk function can be set in such a way
that the music (song) is turned softer, but not
muted altogether.
(3) Press the [MIXER/EFFECT] button.
HINT !! You could combine this with the Chain function
(page 76) and insert a short “announcement tune” between
the actual songs, so that your announcements are easily rec-
ognizable. Of course, you could also play the tune yourself.
The display changes to:
(1) Press the [TALK] button and speak into the
microphone.
All Vocal Harmonizer transformations are now
muted. This includes the [VOCODER], [SMALL],
and [ENSEMBLE] buttons.
(4) Press the [Vocal≈Effect] field.
(2) After your announcement, press the [TALK]
button again (to return to the previous
“singer” settings) and sing to the next song.
Here’s what you need to do to change the level
of the background music, and the amount of
Reverb and/or Delay that is added to your
speaking voice.
Note: See page 54 for an in-depth discussion of the
effects settings.
Note: Press the [Vocal≈HARMONIZER] field to jump to a
page where you can select different presets, etc. (see
p. 22).
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
(5) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the Music Mute field and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
The Reverb Send and Delay Send fields allow
you to add some Reverb and/or Delay to your
voice. While some Reverb (values between “10”
and “40”, for example) could be useful, Delay
should probably only be used as “effect”,
The smaller the value, the softer the song’s and
Keyboard parts’ volume will be. Select “0” if you
do not want the music to be any softer than it
already is.
because it tends to blur your announcements.
Automatic transposition (Singer Key)
Here’s yet another revolutionary function of your DisCover 5: based on information you select or input, it can
change the key of all songs you play back in realtime, thus allowing you (or a guest singer) to sing all songs in a
comfortable range. This function is called “Singer Key”.
(1) For the sake of clarity, first select a song (see
p. 16) and press [®÷ª] to start playback.
Pay attention to the song’s key.
(7) Press one of the USER PRESET fields, and then
[Edit].
(2) Press [®÷ª] again to stop playback, and [|√] to
return to the beginning.
(3) Press the [SINGER≈KEY] button to switch on
this function.
The display changes to:
The display changes to:
Note: The [Edit] field only appears after pressing one of
the USER PRESET fields. The latter are four memories
where you can store your own range settings.
This page contains three presets: [ORIGINAL]
means that the songs are not transposed, while
[MALE] and [FEMALE] adapt the song’s key to
the “typical” range of a male or female voice.
(8) Press the [Highest≈Note] field (if it is not
already selected).
(9) Sing the highest note you can muster effort-
lessly (you can sing it several times).
If you connected a microphone, a [CAPTURE]
field appears. Press this field to confirm the
note you want the DisCover 5 to recognize.
(This field does not appear if you enter the pitch
via the keyboard.)
(4) Press the [MALE] or [FEMALE] field (depending
on whether you’re a man or a woman).
(5) Press the [®÷ª] button to start playback.
The song may now be playing in a different key.
If it is not, the melody falls within the “typical”
range you have just selected.
Note: This automatic transposition only works if track/
MIDI channel “4” of the songs you play back contains
the melody part.
The DisCover 5 recognizes the pitch and dis-
plays the name of the corresponding note.
(6) Press [®÷ª] again to stop playback, and [|√] to
return to the beginning.
(If you have no microphone handy, you can also
play this note on the keyboard.)
That may still have been too high or too low for
comfort… So here comes the best part:
(10)Press the [Lowest≈Note] field and repeat step
(9), taking care to sing your lowest possible
note.
(11)Press [Customize] to store these settings if you
wish to use them at a later stage.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
The display briefly confirms that your settings
have been stored:
• The [A/a] field allows you to switch between
uppercase and lowercase characters.
• The [Delete] field allows you to delete the
inverted character.
• Press [Space] to insert a blank (or the number
“0”).
• If you forgot to insert a character, use [ø] or [˚]
to select the position where the missing char-
acter should be inserted. Then press [Insert], fol-
lowed by the character you wish to insert.
(12)Press the [Back≈to≈SingerK] field to return to
the page of the same name.
(13)Press the [Rename] field to assign a name to
(16)If you’re happy with the name for your
Singer Key settings, press [EXECUTE].
The display briefly confirms that your name has
been stored:
your settings.
(17)Press the [®÷ª] button to start playback.
The song may now be playing in a different key.
If it is not, the melody falls within the range
you set.
®
Entering names
Note: At first, the Singer Key function only works with
the songs on the supplied SmartMedia card. Other songs
you yourself copied to the SmartMedia card need to be
selected, played back for a few measures, and then
saved to card again (even without any changes). Only
then will the Highest and Lowest notes be recognized
the way they should. See page 107 for how to save
songs.
(14)Use the [ø] and [˚] fields to select the position
for which you wish to enter a new character.
(15)Use the alphanumeric keypad in the right
corner to enter the desired characters.
This keypad works exactly like the keypad of a
cellphone: you may have to press an alphanu-
meric field several times to select the desired
character or number.
Displaying Lyrics and chord information
Your DisCover 5 also allows you to view the lyrics of the songs (if available) in the display.
The Lyrics function was provided to allow you to
read the words of the songs being played back in a
karaoke fashion: the words to sing are highlighted
at the right time. Note that this function is only
available for Standard MIDI Files that contain Lyrics
data. Ask your dealer for details.
(1) Select a song (page 16).
(2) Press the [LYRICS&CHORD] button.
Apart from the Lyrics, the DisCover 5 also displays
the chords, which may come in handy for a guitarist
or bassist with whom you are playing.
(3) Start song playback.
The chord information is usually not contained in a
song as such, but that’s no problem: the DisCover 5
can “calculate” it in realtime and even display it a
little ahead of the “changes”.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
The display changes to:
The display changes to:
The chord information appears at the bottom
of the screen.
(4) Press the [VIDEO≈LYRICS] field.
Note: The chord information is calculated in real-time
and may not always be accurate. Also, with chords
where the third has been omitted, no information will
be displayed (because it is impossible to tell whether
those are minor or major chords).
Note: You can also add Lyrics data to songs that do not
yet contain them. See page 96 for details.
®
Using an external monitor
Your DisCover 5 also provides a VIDEO OUTPUT
socket you can connect to the video input of a
TV screen or monitor.
(5) Press the [PAL] or [NTSC] field to select the
desired setting (or the one that works).
Note: If you work with a TV set, do not forget to select
the correct channel (“AV”, or something to that effect,
see the manual that came with your set).
That monitor (or screen) always displays the
Lyrics (if available) and chords, even if you –or
the DisCover 5– select(s) other display pages.
(6) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
(1) Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT socket to the
video input of the TV set or monitor.
page.
(2) Switch on your TV set or monitor and start
playback of a song with Lyrics.
If the lyrics and chords do not appear correctly
on the external screen, proceed as follows:
(3) Press the [MENU] button.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Using the Keyboard parts
Your DisCover 5 provides three “parts” that allow you to play different sounds on the keyboard. That is why these
parts are called “Keyboard parts”. They are available during song playback and while playback is stopped.
Playing with the Upper and/or Lower part
Note: See page 49 for how to set the balance between
the Keyboard parts.
At power-on, the Upper part is automatically
switched on and assigned to the entire keyboard, so
let us start with that part.
(1) Switch off the [SPLIT] button if it lights.
The Lower part can be used in the following
ways:
(2) Press the [UPPER] button if it does not light.
• as a quick way of alternating between two dif-
ferent Tones, whereby one is assigned to the
Upper part and the other to the Lower part.
• as additional sound for the Upper part, in which
case Upper and Lower sound together (this is
called a “Layer”).
• as separate sound for the left half of the key-
board (while the Upper part is assigned to the
right half). This is called “Split” (see below).
(3) Play a few notes on the keyboard.
The Upper part’s sound (“Tone”) is assigned to
all keys. You can therefore play this part with
your left and right hands.
(6) Press the [UPPER] button to switch off the
Upper part.
You could also press the [MULTI-FX] button to
the right of [UPPER] to add an appropriate
effect to the Upper part. See page 52 for
details.
(7) Press the [LOWER] button to switch on the
Lower part.
Note: The Multi-FX is only available for the Upper part.
(4) Use the [VOLUME] knob to set the
DisCover 5’s output volume.
(5) If you are playing to a song, use the
[BALANCE] knob to set the balance between
the song and your live playing.
(8) Play a few notes on the keyboard.
The Lower part’s Tone is assigned to all keys.
You can therefore play this part with your left
and right hands.
(9) To create a layer (Upper + Lower), press the
[UPPER] button (so that it lights).
This also works the other way round: you can
add the Lower part (button originally dark, but
then switched on) to the Upper part (button
lights).
Turn it towards “KEYBOARD” to make your
playing louder. Turn it towards “SONG” if your
playing is too loud with respect to the song.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
Splitting the keyboard
Here’s what you need to do to play separate sounds with your left and right hands:
(1) Press the [SPLIT] button.
To use a different split point:
(2) Press and hold the [SPLIT] button.
The display changes to:
The keyboard is now split into a left (Lower
part) and a right half (Upper part). The Split
point is located at the C4 (white key below the
[INSTRUMENT] button).
(3) Use the [ø] [˚] fields below the displayed key-
board to select the new split point.
Lower
Upper (or M.Drums)
You could also press the [M.DRUMS] button to
assign the M.Drums part to the right half. This
would allow you to play chords with your left
hand (Lower part) and to drum to it with your
right. See below for details about the M.Drums
part.
You can also hold down the [SPLIT] button while
pressing the desired key on the keyboard.
Note: This setting can be written to a User Program and
recalled at a later stage (page 80).
(4) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
Drumming on the keyboard
The DisCover 5 also provides a Keyboard part that allows you to play drums and percussion. This is the
“M.Drums” part.
(1) Switch off the [SPLIT] button if it lights.
(2) Press the [MDRUMS] button.
Every key is assigned to a different drum/per-
cussion sound. Press the leftmost white key
(C2) to sound a bass drum (“kick”), and the
white key to its right (D2) to play a snare sound.
Then, try out the other keys.
This will switch off the [UPPER] button (and the
corresponding part), because Upper and
M.Drums cannot be used simultaneously.
C2
C3
If necessary, you can also press the [SPLIT] but-
ton. In that case, the M.Drums part will be
assigned to the right half of the keyboard, while
you can add chords with the Lower part (which
is assigned to the left half).
(3) Play a few notes on the keyboard.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Choosing other Tones (or Drum Sets)
The DisCover 5 contains 1,422 Tones (or sounds) that can be assigned to the Upper and Lower parts. There are
three methods for assigning Tones to the Upper part (two for the Lower part).
The display now lists eight Tones of the selected
family.
®
TONE FINDER function
(1) If one of the buttons in the SONG MAKEUP
TOOLS section below the display lights, press
[EXIT] to switch it off.
(2) Press the [TONE≈FINDER] button.
The display changes to:
(6) Press the field of the Tone you are interested
in. If you don’t like it, press another field.
(7) If none of the Tones available on this page fit
the bill, use [ø] or [˚] to jump to another page.
The number of Tone pages depends on the fam-
ily you select. If the [˚] field is not displayed in
the bottom right corner, you have reached the
last Tone page of the selected family.
(8) Use the two arrow fields to change the
OCTAVE (transposition) of the selected Tone.
This is only necessary if you feel the Tone is
(3) Take a look at the part name below the mea-
sure indication (right side).
right for what you want to play, but too high or
too low.
If it does not correspond to the part you wish
to assign another Tone to (which can only hap-
pen in Split mode), press and hold the [LOWER]
button until the “UPPER” (or “M.DRUMS”) mes-
sage changes to “LOWER”. The Lower part is
indeed the only additional part that can be
active alongside the Upper (or M.Drums) part.
(9) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
(4) If the [Family] indicator icon is not high-
lighted, press it.
The eight big fields contain the names of the
first eight Tone families.
(5) Press the field that corresponds to the kind of
Tone you need if it is already displayed (in the
above example, [ACCORDION] has been
selected).
Use the [ø] or [˚] field (lower right) to select
another group of up to eight Tone names.
(There are 34 families in all that are divided
over five display pages.)
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
The Tone changes (to correspond to the family
and number of the newly selected group). The
display changes to:
®
Using the numeric buttons and/or the
display
The following is a more traditional approach,
which may nevertheless be practical for experi-
enced users. The display tracks your actions on
the TONE/USER PROGRAM pad, so that you
could start by pressing one of those buttons,
and finish off via the display. (The following
refers to “Tone/User Program Select Mode [2],
see p. 36.)
(1) On the main page, press the row of the part
you wish to assign a different Tone to.
Note: That Tone may not be what you need at all. See
“Choosing the Tone/Drum Set switching system” (p. 35)
for how to change that.
(5) Press a TONE/USER PROGRAM [1]~[8] button
to select a family within this Group.
You can also press a field in the display (and
thus switch to the “other” Group if necessary).
The display now responds with a list of Tones
available in that family:
If the [SPLIT] button does not light, this step is
unnecessary, because Tone selection automati-
cally applies to the active Keyboard part (whose
KEYBOARD PART button lights).
(2) Press the [TONE] button if it doesn’t light.
(6) Press the field of the Tone you are interested
in. If you don’t like it, press another field.
Note: If you picked the wrong family, you can press the
[Family] field to return to the previous display page.
The TONE/USER PROGRAM [1]~[8] buttons allow
you to select sounds and registrations (“User
Programs”). You therefore need to specify what
you want these buttons to do.
GVariations
If you think the Tone you selected is close, but
not entirely what you need, you can refine your
selection as follows:
(3) Take a look at the numeric buttons in the
TONE/USER PROGRAM section.
If the name of the Tone family (GM/GS family
mapping) is printed above a number button,
that family belongs to Group “A”. Names
printed below the number buttons belong to
group “B”.
(7) On the above display page, press the
[Variations] field.
There are two Groups with 8 banks each.
(8) Press a field on this page to select a Tone
Variation.
(4) Press the [GROUP] button once or twice (so
that the “A” or “B” indicator lights).
You can also press the [A] or [B] field in the dis-
play.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
This Variation system is used to provide access
to all Tones you can select. After all, 2 Groups ×
8 families × 8 memories add up to 128 possibil-
ities, which is only a fraction of the Tones you
can select.
(13)Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
Hence the Variation system, which adds a “sub-
category” to the Tone memories. The number of
Variations varies from Tone to Tone: it can be
anything between 1 and 50. See the included
“Tone & Drum Set Lists”.
Next time you select the ORGAN family page
(because you want to choose an organ Tone),
the display will look as follows:
(9) Press the field of the desired Variation.
(10)If you are still not happy with the Tone, use
the [1]~[5] fields (right side) to select the cor-
responding page and its 10 Variations (if
available).
If you now return to the Tone memory page, it
may look as follows:
(The first memory no longer recalls the “Organ
1” Tone, but the “Full Organ 6” variation.)
GChoosing the Tone/Drum Set switching
system
Your DisCover 5 uses a new system for Tone
and Drum Set selection (at least as far as
Roland aficionados are concerned): when you
press the [GROUP] button or when you select a
GM/GS family (formerly called a “bank”), the
DisCover 5 immediately recalls the Tone of the
same memory (and family) of the new group.
The symbol means that the selected Varia-
tion is being used (see also its “address” in the
upper right corner), but that your choice will
not be remembered. So next time you select
that Tone memory (“A31”), the DisCover 5 will
once again use the “Organ 1” Tone.
Example: if you are currently working with Tone
A41, selecting Group B will activate Tone B41,
which may not be at all what you need.
To ensure that the “Full Organ 6” Tone is
assigned to the “number position” (1 in this
case) –thus replacing the “Organ 1” Tone–, you
need to proceed as follows:
If you prefer the DisCover 5 to go on using the
previous Tone (or Drum Set) until you have
selected the Tone/Drum Set memory, here is
what you need to do:
(11)Press the [Variations] field.
If you’re still on the Variation page (see step (7)
above), this step is unnecessary.
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(12)Press the [Customize] field to store your Varia-
tion assignment.
The display briefly responds with the following
message and then returns to the Tone memory
page.
The display changes to:
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touring your DisCover 5
(2) Press the [UTILITY] field. If the [Global] field in
the left column is not displayed in white,
press it.
The display changes to:
(3) To select a Tone from this list, first press the
[FAVOURITE≈TONE] button and then briefly
press a field.
(3) Press the [1] or [2] field:
[1] means that the TONE/USER PROGRAM but-
tons are used for selecting the GROUP (A or B)
and the family. The DisCover 5 immediately
switches memories. To select a different mem-
ory (“Number”) within the active bank, you
need to work via the display.
You could also use the [GROUP] and [1]~[8] but-
tons.
Note: Press and hold the TONE/USER PROGRAM [1]~[8]
button you wish to assign the selected Tone to until the
following confirmation appears:
[2] means that pressing a TONE/USER PRO-
GRAM button once selects the GM/GS family
but does not yet change Tones/User Programs.
Press the same (or a different) numeric button
[1]~[8] to specify the memory and to recall that
Tone. Furthermore, no sound switch can be
triggered simply by selecting another Group.
(4) Press [EXIT] to leave this page.
(4) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
(5) Press the [FAVOURITE≈TONE] button again (or
the [TONE] or [USER≈PROGRAM] button) to
switch off this function.
®
Selecting Drum Sets
As stated earlier, the M.Drums part doesn’t use
Tones but “Drum Sets”. Drum Sets are collec-
tions of up to 128 different drum and percus-
sion sounds, each assigned to a different key.
®
Working with Tone Favorites
The DisCover 5 contains 44 Drum Sets. Drum
Set selection is similar to Tone selection, and
you can use both the Tone Finder routine
(which is then called Drum Set Finder) and the
TONE/USER PROGRAM buttons.
The DisCover 5 allows you to memorize the 16
Tones you need most often. Let us have a look
at how to assign your favorite Tones to those
memories and how to select them.
Note: There are 16 memories in all (8 for Group A, and 8
for Group B). These assignments are not written to a
User Program and only apply to the Upper Tone.
Here’s what the Drum Set Finder page looks
like:
(1) Select the Tone you want to define as favor-
ite (see above).
(2) Press and hold the [FAVOURITE≈TONE] button.
The [Family] field should look familiar: it allows
you to specify what kind of Drum Set you need.
(There are no “Groups” on this page.)
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
After specifying the family by pressing one of
the eight big fields, press the [Set] field. The dis-
play changes to:
OCTAVE therefore doesn’t change the pitch of
the sounds: it assigns other sounds to the keys.
Here’s an example:
C2
C3
OCTAVE= 0
Use the arrow fields to change the OCTAVE of
the selected Drum Set.
C2
C3
This is only necessary if you do not have access
to the desired drum/percussion sounds. Some
Drum Sets indeed provide up to 128 such
sounds, while the keyboard only has 61 keys.
OCTAVE= –1
Drum Set selection via the TONE/USER PRO-
GRAM buttons works exactly like Tone selec-
tion. But also in that case, there is no need to
select the group: there are no Drum Set groups.
Using the D Beam Controller
The D Beam Controller allows you to control various aspects of your performance, or to add something to the
music, by moving your hand, head, etc., in the air. You only need to make sure that you do so over the two “eyes”
and within a 40cm ( 16”) range. Your movements are translated into musical expression.
(1) Press the D BEAM CONTROLLER [ON/OFF] but-
(4) Move your hand towards and away from the
D Beam’s “eyes”.
ton (it must light).
What you hear now is the “VinylRPM” effect.
Now let’s do some scratching…
Let’s first try out the DJ GEAR functions.
(2) Press the [ASSIGN] button (next to the
[ON÷OFF] button) until the DJ GEAR indicator
lights.
(5) Press the [SCRATCH] field.
(6) Again move your hand towards and away
from the D Beam.
Now you should hear a scratch sound.
Try out some other effects by pressing the
[Sound≈FX] and [Instruments] fields and selecting
one of the available options.
The display changes to:
(You can also press the [ASSIGN] button to
select D Beam modes.)
Note: See p. 41 for full details about the D Beam Con-
troller.
(7) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
(3) Start playback of a song (page 16).
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the performance functions
4. Using the performance functions
Let us now have a look at the DisCover 5’s performance functions. Also called controllers, they allow you to add
expression to your playing, which is a very important aspect for simulating glissando’s, bendings, and other
changes that will make your melodies even more convincing.
Pitch Bend and Modulation
The BENDER/MODULATION lever to the left of the DisCover 5’s keyboard can be used to add two kinds of effects to
the Keyboard part notes (Upper, Lower, M.Drums). You can even use these effects simultaneously if you like.
(1) Press the lever towards the rear of the
DisCover 5 to add a vibrato effect (“wobble”)
to the notes you are playing.
(2) Turn the lever to the left to temporarily lower
the pitch of the notes you are playing. Turn it
to the right to raise the pitch of your notes.
The Pitch Bend interval (“range”) is preset to 2
semi-tones.
MODULATION
(3) Release the lever if you no longer need the
effect.
Lowers the
pitch
Raises the
pitch
BENDER
The Modulation axis can also be used for
switching between the slow and fast Rotary
speeds (if the “Rotary” effect is assigned to the
Multi-FX).
Transposition
If you are used to playing a song in a particular key, the Transpose function will help you go on playing in that key
while sounding in another one. That way, you can accompany a singer or instrument without changing your fin-
gering.
(1) Press the TRANSPOSE [√≈ƒ] button to trans-
pose the DisCover 5 down by up to 6 semi-
tones.
The transposition interval is indicated on the
main page:
(2) Press the TRANSPOSE [≈®] button to trans-
pose the DisCover 5 up by up to 5 semi-tones.
Transposition never applies to M.Drums part (or
the drum part of a song).
The “Cꢁ” actually refers to a semitone increase
of the pitch, so that you hear a “C sharp” every
time you play a “C”. It also means that, rather
than the “A” you press, you will hear “A sharp”
(or “B flat”). The above setting corresponds to
pressing [≈®] once.
Note: Any interval you set here automatically resets
(and thus overrides) the Singer Key transposition (see
p. 28). In fact, the latter is reset to ORIGINAL, after
which the new transposition value is used.
To transpose from the key of C to E, press [≈®]
four times. To transpose from C to G, press [√≈ƒ]
five times.
Be sure to return to the original setting (no
transposition) by simultaneously pressing [√≈ƒ]
and [≈®].
As long as the interval is different from “0”, one
of these buttons lights to signal that the Trans-
pose function is active.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Setting the transposition interval via the display
If you prefer to set the transposition interval via the touch screen with a nice graphic, here is how to.
(1) Press and hold the TRANSPOSE [√≈ƒ] or [≈®]
[Song]: Only the song parts will be transposed.
button.
Though it is perfectly possible to switch on both
options, at least one of them must be on. “Key-
board” could be useful for transposing only the
Keyboard parts so that you can play to a song
in “your” key but sound in the song’s key.
Note: If you also want note messages received via MIDI
to be transposed, you must set “Transpose” (p. 103) to
“ON”.
(4) If necessary, set the GLOBAL TRANSPOSE
value using the [ø≈ƒ] [≈˚] fields.
This value is in fact a “master transpose control”
for all sections of the DisCover 5. Its value is
added to the current transposition interval (and
the Singer Key as well as User Program transpo-
sition) until you reset it to “0”, or until you
switch off your DisCover 5.
(2) In the display, press the key that corresponds
to the note you would like to hear every time
you play a C.
Note: Selecting “0” means that the transposition is off.
Your setting can, however, be written to a User Program
(page 80).
(5) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
(3) Press the [Keyboard] and/or [Song] field to
switch it on.
These fields allow you to specify which parts
should be affected by the Transpose setting:
[Keyboard]: The Upper and/or Lower parts will
be transposed.
Note: The M.Drums part is never transposed.
Keyboard Touch (velocity sensitivity)
Of course, the DisCover 5’s keyboard is also velocity sensitive. This allows you to control the timbre and volume of
the Keyboard parts by varying the force with which you strike the keys.
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(2) Press the [SPLIT≈&≈TOUCH] field.
The display changes to:
(3) Press a field in the lower part to set the
desired velocity sensitivity:
[Low]: Select this setting if you are used to
playing on an electronic organ or if you do not
want velocity changes to bring about major
volume changes.
[Mid]: Medium velocity sensitivity. The keyboard
responds to velocity changes, but the maximum
volume can be obtained more easily than with
“High”. (This is the default setting.)
[High]: Select this setting for maximum expres-
siveness. Even small variations of the force with
which you strike a key produce audible
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the performance functions
changes. The trade-off is, however, that you
have to strike the keys forcefully to achieve the
maximum volume.
Select them and try playing at different veloci-
ties (strengths) to find out the rich nuances
that can be obtained. There is a trumpet Tone,
for example (“V Trumpet”, A81, Variation 13)
that allows you to alternate between a “closed”
and “open” muted trumpet simply by hitting
the keys softer or harder. Various guitar Tones
provide hammering-on/bending sounds when
you strike the keys as hard as you can.
(4) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
On top of that, transposing the keyboard to the
lowest octave (using the OCTAVE parameter on
various pages) sometimes provides access to
some typical noises (scraping over the strings,
hitting the body of an acoustic guitar, etc.).
About the DisCover 5’s Tones
All Tones of your DisCover 5 are fantastic, of
course, but some of them are truly amazing. In
the supplied “Tone & Drum Set Lists” document
(and on the display pages), look out for Tones
that start with a “V” (for “virtual”).
Such realism could be achieved in SPLIT mode:
assign the same Tone to the Upper and Lower
parts, but select the lowest octave (–4) for the
Lower part. That way, you can play the “noises”
with your left hand.
Master Tune
This is not really a performance function, but it allows you to tune your DisCover 5 to acoustic instruments that
cannot be tuned.
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(2) Press the [MASTER≈TUNE] field.
The display changes to:
(3) Use the [VALUE] dial to set the desired tuning.
The default value is “440.0”. You can return to
this value by pressing the [440.0Hz] field.
(4) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
D Beam functions
We still owe you an explanation or two about how to assign the desired function to the D Beam controller and
what they mean. Let’s have a look at how to do that.
Tape Rewind: allows you add the sound you hear
when you rewind a cassette tape without stopping
playback (the music plays backwards and at high
speed).
The D Beam Controller has two sensors that detect
motion (such as your hand or body movements) in
front of it. These “sensed” positions are translated
into MIDI messages that can be assigned to a variety
of parameters.
®
Sound EFX
(1) Press the D BEAM CONTROLLER [ON/OFF]
button (it must light).
Here, you can select various “noises” to be added to
your music simply by moving your hand over the D
Beam. We will not try to describe them: just try them
out!
(2) Use the [ASSIGN] button to select the func-
tion the D Beam Controller should perform.
There are 4 groups (DJ GEAR, SOUND EFX,
INSTRUMENTS, and CONTROLS). This means
that you may have to press the [ASSIGN] button
several times in order to select the desired
function.
To assign another function to the D Beam Con-
troller:
(3) Press the [ASSIGN] button.
If necessary, press the [˚] field to go to the second
page.
(4) Press the field that corresponds to the desired
function (see below).
(5) Use the [DJ≈Gear], [Sound≈EFX], [Instruments]
and [Controls] fields to select the remaining
groups and assign the desired function as
well.
(Press [ø] to return to the previous page.)
®
Instruments
The assignments of all four groups (DJ GEAR,
SOUND FX, INSTRUMENT, CONTROLS) will be
written to a User Program (one per group), so
that you can also alternate between these
groups while playing – and still use your favor-
ite settings.
In this case, the D Beam will play musical notes. The
pitch and chords of those patterns depend on the
notes you play on the keyboard. Please try out the
options on offer. It’s the quickest way to find out
how they sound and work.
®
DJ Gear
Vinyl RPM: allows you to simulate the sound you
hear when manually turning a vinyl record to locate
(cue) the position where you wish to start playback.
Cutting: this is a very powerful filter effect that
allows you to suppress the high frequencies in a
rhythmic way (like a DJ does sometimes).
TT Motor: simulates the effect you hear when you
suddenly stop a turntable: the playback speed
decreases, while the pitch drops and the sound
becomes muffled.
Scratch: the D Beam Controller can be used for add-
ing scratch noises. You know what that is, don’t
you…?
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the performance functions
I Chord Oct 1/2/3: By holding your hand inside the
D Beam’s range, you cause the Lower part to sound
the notes extracted from the current song. You could
use this function to add syncopated brass or guitar
“hits” to your melody. The velocity value used for
playing these notes is “100”. The number (1, 2, or 3)
®
Controls
All options marked with a “º” apply to the Upper part
only.
bears on the octave of this “added chord”:
1
= Aꢂ3~
G4,
2= Aꢂ4~G5, and
3= Aꢂ5~G6. Move your hand
outside the D Beam’s range to stop the Lower part
from sounding the chord.
I Melody Mute: By holding your hand inside the D
Beam’s range, you switch off the melody part (track
4) of the song you are playing back. A second move-
ment will switch the melody on again. This function
corresponds to one of the Minus-One options
(page 19).
I Play/Stop: Depending on the current condition of
song playback (running or stopped), one move inside
the D Beam’s range stops (or starts) it. A second
movement will start (or stop) it again.
I Tempo Up/Down: Select one of these options if
you want to increase (Up) or decrease (Down) the
current song tempo. By moving your hand outside
the D Beam’s range, you return to the previous
tempo value.
I Pitch Bender Up: By moving your hand over the
D Beam, you can generate a value between “64” (no
Pitch Bend) and “127” (maximum upward bend). As
soon as you move your hand outside the D Beam’s
reach (higher than 40cm above the “eyes” or fur-
ther to the left or right), the value returns to “64” (no
Pitch Bend).
I Pitch Bender Dw: By moving your hand over the
D Beam, you can generate a value between “64” (no
Pitch Bend) and “0” (maximum downward bend). As
soon as you move your hand outside the D Beam’s
reach, the value returns to “64” (no Pitch Bend).
I Modulation: Select this function if you want the
D Beam to duplicate the modulation function of the
Bender/Modulation lever.
I Accomp Mute: By holding your hand inside the D
Beam’s range, you mute all parts of the song you are
playing back – except the melody, bass, and drums. A
second movement will switch the accompaniment
on again. This function corresponds to one of the
Minus-One options (page 19).
I Drum&Bass Mute: By holding your hand inside
the D Beam’s range, you mute the bass and drums of
the song you are playing back. A second movement
will switch these parts on again. This function corre-
sponds to one of the Minus-One options (page 19).
I Rotary S/F: Allows you to select the slow or fast
speeds of the Rotary effect. This only works, if the
Rotary effect is currently assigned to the Multi-FX.
I Filter Upº: By moving your hand over the D Beam,
you can vary the brightness of the Upper part. This
allows you to create some nifty filter effects that are
particularly useful for Dance/Techno music. When
you move your hand outside the D Beam’s range, the
sound returns to its normal value.
I Filter Dwº: By moving your hand over the D Beam,
you can vary the brightness of the Upper part. This is
the opposite of the above: you can make the sounds
mellower.
I Arpeggio Oct 1/2/3: By moving your hand over
the D Beam, you cause the Lower part to play arpeg-
gios (broken chords) based on the notes extracted
from the current song. Depending on the setting you
select here, the notes will be arpeggiated over 1, 2, or
3 octaves.
Note: Do not forget to assign a suitable Tone to the
Lower part.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Using optional footswitches
I Play/Stop: Starts and stops song playback. Same
function as the [®÷ª] button.
I Lower Hold: The footswitch allows you to hold
the Lower part.
I Sostenuto: In this case, the footswitch functions
as Sostenuto pedal (a pedal found on grand and dig-
ital pianos that allows you to sustain only those
notes you played at the time you pressed the pedal).
I Soft: In this case, the footswitch functions as Soft
pedal (a pedal found on grand and digital pianos that
reduces the volume).
Sustain/damper footswitch (Hold)
The HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket on the DisCover 5’s
rear panel allows you to connect an optional DP-2,
DP-6, or BOSS FS-5U footswitch. The Hold function
can be used for the Upper and Lower parts, on con-
dition that the [SPLIT] button does not light.
In SPLIT mode, the Hold function only applies to the
Upper part.
Note: Do not forget to connect an optional DP-2, DP-6, or
BOSS FS-5U footswitch to the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket.
I Rotary S/F: Allows you to select the slow or fast
speeds of the Rotary effect. This only works, if the
Rotary effect is currently assigned to the Multi-FX.
I Talk: The footswitch performs the same function
as the [TALK] button in the VOCAL HARMONIZER sec-
tion.
I Harmony On/Off: The footswitch allows you to
switch the currently selected HARMONY function
([VOCODER], [SMALL] or [ENSEMBLE]) on and off.
Select this function if you want to be able to switch
the harmonies on for the choruses, and off for the
verses (for example) while playing on the keyboard.
I Fade In/Out: The footswitch performs the same
function as the [FADE] button on the front panel. See
also page 68.
Foot Switch
An optional DP-2, DP-6, or BOSS FS-5U footswitch
connected to the FOOT SWITCH socket can be used
to perform various functions. If you do not change
the factory setting, this footswitch allows you to
start and stop song playback.
Here’s how to select another footswitch function:
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
I User Program Up: Selects the next User Program
(i.e. A12 if A11 is currently active).
The display changes to:
I Favourite Tone Up: The footswitch allows you to
select the next FAVOURITE TONE memory. Example: If
memory “7” of GROUP A is currently selected, press-
ing the footswitch takes you to memory “8”.
You can also change GROUPS with this function. So
after selecting “A8”, pressing the footswitch again
takes you to “B1”.
Note: See page 36 for details about the TONE FAVOU-
RITE function.
(2) Press the [FOOTSWITCH] field.
I M.Drums: The footswitch can be used to activate
and switch off the M.Drums part. If the [SPLIT] button
lights, the M.Drums part replaces the Upper part.
Otherwise, the M.Drums part is assigned to all keys.
I Minus One: The footswitch allows you to switch
the Minus-One function on and off. See page 19 for
how to select the option that will be used when the
Minus-On function is on.
(3) Press the field that corresponds to the desired
footswitch function.
If necessary, press [˚] (or [ø], on the second
page) to change pages.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the performance functions
(4) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
Expression (Foot Pedal)
An optional EV-5, EV-7 or BOSS FV-300L expression pedal connected to the FOOT PEDAL socket allows you to
control the volume of the Keyboard parts. You can also specify to which Keyboard part(s) this function should
apply, and how the pedal works:
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(4) Use the [VALUE] dial to select one of the fol-
lowing options:
I ON: The expression pedal is assigned to the
selected Keyboard part.
I REV: The expression pedal is assigned to the
selected Keyboard part, but works the other way
around: when the pedal is pressed (toe down), the
Keyboard part is inaudible. When the pedal is up
(heel down), the Keyboard part uses its maximum
volume. You can use this for blending effetcs
between the Upper (“ON”) and Lower (“REV”) parts,
for example.
The display changes to:
I OFF: The expression pedal is not assigned to the
selected Keyboard part.
(2) Press the [UTILITY] field. If the [FootPedal] field
in the left corner is not displayed in white,
press it.
(3) Press the field of the Keyboard part whose
expression assignment you want to change.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Scale Tuning
Another useful function is called Scale Tuning. It allows you to use oriental, Asian, and other scales in much the
same way as on an oriental keyboard (EM-55 OR, etc.).
The DisCover 5 contains three memories where you
can store your favorite tunings. These are three glo-
bal memories that apply to all User Programs.
If you now returned to the main page, you
would notice that the DisCover 5 alerts you to
the fact that the Scale Tuning function has
been switched on:
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
The display changes to:
But let us not return to the main page just yet.
Changing the pitch of other notes
Changing the pitch of other notes than the
ones already highlighted is a matter of pressing
the desired on-screen keys in question. And
defeating the pitch change of a key displayed in
white is as easy as pressing that key again (it
will once again be displayed in white).
(2) Press the [SCALE≈TUNE] field.
Press all white on-screen keys (or the [Mem]
field that is displayed in white) to switch the
Scale Tuning function off again.
GCustomizing the pitch changes
At first, pressing an on-screen key, so that it is
displayed in white, means that its pitch is low-
ered by 50 cents (1/4 tone, or “–50”). There may
be situations where you actually want to raise
the pitch of a note, or select a different tuning:
(4) Press the on-screen key of the note/key
whose pitch you want to change.
(3) Press a [Mem≈1]~[Mem≈3] field to select a
Scale Tuning memory.
This will change the pitch of the following
notes (“–50” means that the note in question is
tuned a quarter tone down):
Mem 1
Mem 2
Mem 3
E (–50)
B (–50)
E (–50)
A (–50)
C# (–50)
F# (–50)
The pitch of the other notes is left unchanged.
The keys corresponding to the notes whose
pitch is changed are displayed in white for easy
identification.
That field is displayed in white. As stated earlier,
the pitch of all notes is at first set to “–50” (one
quarter tone down). You can however, select
any value between “–64” (slightly lower than a
quarter tone down) and “63” (slightly higher
than a quarter tone up).
You will notice that every note can be selected
only once. That is because the value you specify
applies to all notes of the same name. If you
change the tuning of the “C”, that value will be
added to or subtracted from all Cs (C1, C2, C3,
etc.). The on-screen keys are used as “on/off
switches”.
(5) Use the [VALUE] dial to set the desired pitch.
If you selected a [Mem] field, an asterisk (*) is
displayed to indicate that the stored settings
have changed.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the performance functions
You can also select the desired value field with
the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons.
(9) Press a [Mem≈1]~[Mem≈3] field to save your
settings in the corresponding Scale Tuning
memory.
(6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) for the other notes
The display now responds with the following
message and then returns to the Scale Tune
page.
whose pitch you want to change.
Note: This pitch is only used when the corresponding
on-screen key is displayed in white. Do not forget to
switch it on.
GStoring your new scale
If you think you’ll need that scale in the future,
you should write – or “Memorize”– it:
(7) Program the scale you wish to save by
switching the desired notes on or off (see
above).
(8) Press the [Memorize] field in the lower right
corner of the display.
(10)Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
The display now looks as follows:
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
5. Before you start editing (Menu)
The DisCover 5 provides a number of “hidden” functions you may only need every so often. Certain functions,
though “on the menu”, can also be selected by pressing and holding the assigned button. The following is only pro-
vided for your orientation, as all functions on this menu are covered elsewhere (where it makes sense to mention
them). Yet other functions can be recalled via dedicated buttons and therefore do not appear on the Menu page.
Here’s what’s part of the Menu environment and
where to find details about those parameters.
Note: Except for the MASTER TUNE, MIDI, and UTILITY set-
tings, all parameter values and assignments can be written to
a User Program (page 80).
• [SPLIT≈&≈TOUCH]: Provides access to two
parameters related to the Keyboard parts:
Split point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 32
Touch sensitivity (dynamics). . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 39
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
• [TRANSPOSE]: Allows you to set the transposi-
tion interval via the display and to specify
which sections should be transposed.. . . . . p. 38
The display changes to:
• [VIDEO≈LYRICS]: Allows you to make settings
related to an optional TV screen or monitor.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 30
(2) Press the field that provides access to the
function you are interested in:
• [MASTER≈TUNE]: Allows you to tune the
DisCover 5 as a whole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 40
Use this parameter when you wish to accom-
pany other instruments or play to a CD, cas-
sette, etc.
• [FADE≈IN/OUT]: Allows you to specify how fast
fades triggered via the [FADE] button should be
carried out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 68
• [SCALE≈TUNE]: Allows you to use and/or pro-
gram different tuning systems for oriental
music, and the like. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 45
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start editing (Menu)
• [D≈BEAM]: Allows you to assign the desired
function to the D Beam controller. . . . . . . .p. 41
• [UTILITY]: Allows you to specify the following:
Which MIDI Set and/or User Program to load
when the DisCover 5 is switched on.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 85 and 104
• [FOOTSWITCH]: Allows you to assign the
desired function to an optional DP-2, DP-6, or
BOSS FS-5U footswitch.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 43
How the TONE/USER PROGRAM buttons should
work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 35
Whether the Multi-FX should be linked to the
Tone selected for the Upper part. . . . . . . . . p. 54
Whether the pre-programmed effect settings
should be loaded each time you press a button
in the VOCAL HARMONIZER section.. . . . . . p. 55
• [VOCAL≈HARMONIZER]: Provides access to set-
tings with which you can fine-tune the Vocal
Harmonizer’s behavior for your own voice,
transformed voice signals, and harmonies. You
can also set the equalizer by pressing the
[Equalizer] field.
Use the fields at the right edge of the display to
select the part (mode) whose settings you wish
to change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 61
To set playback-specific parameters (Player)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p. 18
To select the Keyboard parts that should be
affected by an optional expression pedal – and
how this should be done (FootPedal) . . . . . p. 44
(3) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
• [MARK≈JUMP]: Allows you to program the
desired locations that can be recalled using the
MARK JUMP [1]~[4] buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 69
• [MIDI]: Provides access to the DisCover 5’s MIDI
parameters.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 99
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
6. Working with the Mixer & using effects
The MIXER environment does what its name suggests: it allows you to balance the various Keyboard parts of your
DisCover 5. See page 87 and following for how to “mix” the song parts.
Your singing and the generated Vocal Harmonizer parts can be “mixed” using the [VOICE] and [HARMONY] knobs.
About the DisCover 5’s effects
The DisCover 5 contains the following effects pro-
cessors, not all of which are available for all sec-
tions. So please carefully study the following table:
The reason why we are talking about “processors” is
that most of them can be used in various ways (by
selecting a “Type”). The Multi-FX is, of course the
most versatile processor, because it can use one of
47 types, while other processors provide 8 or 9 pos-
sibilities. Only the Compressor and Gate processors
are “dedicated” effects: they can “only” function as
Compressor or Gate.
Section
Effects processors
Reverb, Chorus
Remarks
Song
Same as Keyboard parts
Same as song section
Keyboard parts
Upper part
Reverb, Chorus
Multi-FX + same as above Multi-FX only for Upper (and
then no Chorus)
Note: See page 62 for how to set the VOCAL HARMONIZER
equalizers.
VOICE
Reverb, Delay, Compres- Talk, Singer, Auto Tune,
sor, Gate
Voice FX
HARMONY
Reverb, Delay, Chorus
Vocoder, Small, Ensemble
Mixing Keyboard parts
Here’s how to set the balance and other “mix-related” parameters of the Keyboard parts.
(1) Press the [MIXER/EFFECT] button.
(2) Move the on-screen sliders to set the desired
volume for the various Keyboard parts.
The D BEAM part refers to the sounds that are
generated when you use the D Beam controller
after selecting the DJ GEAR, SOUND EFX or
INSTRUMENT mode (scratches, sound effects,
other “noises”). See page 41 for details.
The display changes to:
Use these sliders as “sub mixer”, to establish the
correct balance between the Keyboard parts.
(3) After setting these levels, you can use the
[BALANCE] knob to establish the correct bal-
ance between the Keyboard parts and the
song.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with the Mixer & using effects
More refined Mixer settings
“Mixing”, as you may know, entails a lot more than just getting the balances right. It also involves specifying the
stereo placement of sounds and the amount of effect that should be applied. So here we go…
Note: There are no “Keyboard Mixer” parameters for the
D Beam part. Moreover, this part is never processed by
any of the DisCover 5’s effects.
(1) On the above display page, press the
[Keyboard≈Effect] field.
The display changes to:
(2) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
I Reverb Send & Chorus Send: Use these parame-
ters to set the Reverb or Chorus send level (how
much effect should be applied to the part in ques-
tion). The effects themselves can be edited on the
Effect page (see below).
Note: The M.Drums parameters on this page apply to
the entire Drum Set and cannot be set for each drum/
percussion instrument individually (unlike the send
parameter of the song drum part).
The “Chorus Send” parameter of the Upper part
is not available when the [MULTI-FX] button
lights. In that case, the page above looks as fol-
lows:
I PanPot: Use this parameter to set the stereo
placement of the selected part. “L63” corresponds to
hard left, “0” to dead center, and “R63” to hard right.
“Rnd” means that the stereo position of each note
changes.
I Volume: Use this parameter to set the volume of
the selected part. This parameter duplicates the slid-
ers on the Global page.
[Back≈to≈Global] Press this field to return to the
Global page (the one with the on-screen slid-
ers).
[Sound≈Edit] See page 59.
[Effect≈Type] Press this field if you want to edit
the effects settings themselves.
Editing the Keyboard (and song) effects processors
After setting the above parameters, you may find that even sensible Reverb/Chorus Send values for the Key-
board parts do not yield the expected result.
In that case, you should edit the Reverb and Chorus
(2) Press the field of the effect type you wish to
settings, by pressing the [Effect≈Type] field.
use.
The options are:
If, after pressing the [MIXER/EFFECT] button, the
page with the faders is displayed, press the left
[Effect≈Type] field (the one with the keyboard icon).
[Room1], [Room2], [Room3] These types simulate
the Reverb characteristics of a room. The higher the
number (1, 2, or 3), the “bigger” the room becomes.
GReverb for Keyboard parts
[Hall1], [Hall2] These types simulate the Reverb of a
small (1) or large (2) concert hall and thus sound
much “bigger” than the Room types above.
(1) Press the [Reverb] field in the upper left cor-
ner to gain access to the Reverb parameters.
The display changes to:
[Plate] Digital simulation of a metal plate that is
sometimes used for creating Reverb effects. Works
well for percussive sounds.
[Delay] A Delay effect (no Reverb). Works a lot like an
echo effect and thus repeats the sounds.
[Pan≈Delay] This is a stereo version of the above
Delay effect. It creates repetitions that alternate
between the left and right channels.
If necessary, you can correct the Send levels
after selecting a different Reverb type.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
(3) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
If necessary, you can correct the Send levels
after selecting a different Chorus type.
(3) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Note: UPPER Chorus Send is only available if the
[MULTI-FX] button does not light. If it lights, the Upper
part is not processed by the Chorus.
[Level] allows you to set the output level of the
Reverb processor. Setting this parameter to “0”
means that your no longer hear the effect in
question.
[Level] allows you to set the output level of the
Chorus processor. Setting this parameter to “0”
means that your no longer hear the effect in
question.
By contrast, setting [Reverb≈Send] on the Key-
board Mixer page to “0” means that the
selected Keyboard part is no longer processed
by the effect, while the remaining Keyboard
parts are.
By contrast, setting [Chorus≈Send] on the Key-
board Mixer page to “0” means that the
selected Keyboard part is no longer processed
by the effect, while the remaining Keyboard
parts are.
(4) Press the [Keyboard≈Effect] field to return to
the page of the same name. Press
[Back≈to≈Global] to return to the display page
with the sliders.
You may have noticed the [MULTI-FX] field.
That’s up next. But first…
GChorus for Keyboard parts
(1) Press the [Chorus] field in the upper left cor-
ner to gain access to the Chorus parameters.
The display changes to:
(4) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
(2) Press the field of the effect type you wish to
use.
Chorus broadens the spatial image of the sound
and creates a stereo impression. You can
choose from 8 types of Chorus.
[Chorus1]~[Chorus4] These are conventional Cho-
rus effects that add spaciousness and depth to the
sound.
[Fb≈Chorus] This type produces a Flanger-like effect
and has a soft sound.
[Flanger] This is an effect that sounds somewhat like
a jet airplane taking off and landing.
[Delay] This is a Delay (echo effect) with a short
Delay time.
[Pan≈Delay] This is a short Delay with many repeats
that alternate between the left and right channels.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with the Mixer & using effects
Using the multi-effects processor (Multi-FX)
Your DisCover 5 contains a multi-effects processor that can be used for processing the Upper part. If you switch it
on, the Upper part is no longer processed by the Chorus effect.
(1) Press the [UPPER] button (it must light).
(3) Play a few notes on the keyboard, and switch
the [MULTI-FX] button on/off to hear the dif-
ference.
(2) Select the “A32 Jazz Organ” Tone:
Press [TONE], [GROUP] (to select Group “A”), [3],
field [2]. The [MULTI-FX] button lights.
(4) Press the BENDER/MODULATION lever
towards the back of the DisCover 5.
The speed of the Rotary effect now changes
(either slow or fast undulations).
The Upper part is now processed by the effect
type currently assigned to the Multi-FX proces-
sor (“Rotary”).
Note: This switching function can also be assigned to
an optional footswitch (see p. 43).
Selecting another Multi-FX type
The Rotary effect that is assigned to the Multi-FX by default is wonderful for organ and other sounds.
Overdrv1~4: Overdrive creates a soft distortion sim-
ilar to that produced by tube amplifiers. Several
types of overdrive are available: (1) Small combo
amp, (2) large combo amp, (3) Large double-stack
amp (2 cabinets), (4) Large double-stack amp (3 cabi-
nets).
Distort1~4: This effect produces a more intense dis-
tortion than Overdrive. The numbers refer to differ-
ent kinds of distortion.
For a guitar sound, however, working with distor-
tion can be more effective. In fact, the DisCover 5
provides 47 different Multi-FX types, some of which
are combinations of two effects for added flexibility.
Here is how to select another Multi-FX type:
(1) Press and hold the [MULTI-FX] button until
the display looks as follows:
Phaser: Adds a phase-shifted sound to the original
sound, producing a twisting modulation that creates
spaciousness and depth.
AutoWah: The Auto Wah cyclically controls a filter
to create cyclic change in timbre.
Rotary: Simulates the sound of a classic rotary
speaker. This effect is most suitable for electric organ.
StFlangr: This is a stereo Flanger. It produces a
metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet air-
plane taking off or landing.
SpFlangr: A Step Flanger is a Flanger effect with
clearly noticeable steps rather than continuous pitch
changes.
Compress: A compressor reduces signal peaks and
boosts low levels, smoothing out unevenness in vol-
ume.
Limiter: A limiter prevents the volume from exceed-
ing a certain level without boosting low levels.
HexaCho: Hexa Chorus uses six layers of chorused
sound to give richness and spatial spread to the
sound.
Trem Cho: Tremolo Chorus is a Chorus effect with
added Tremolo (cyclic modulation of the volume).
StChorus: This is a stereo Chorus.
You can also select this page by pressing the
[MIXER/EFFECT] button→ [Keyboard≈Effect]
field→ [Effect≈Type] field. But the above method
is a lot faster.
(2) Press one of the 12 fields in the upper part of
the display to select another Multi-FX type.
(3) If none of the types on this page appeal to
you, use the PAGE [1]~[4] fields at the right to
jump to another page with different types.
Note: Selecting “Thru” means that the Multi-FX is off
(yet the Chorus effect will not be available for the Upper
part). Also note that you only hear the Multi-FX if the
[MULTI-FX] button lights.
Note: Multi-FX type selection can be linked to Tone
selection for the Upper part. See page 54.
Space-D: A multiple Chorus that gives no impression
of modulation, but produces a transparent Chorus
effect (the perfect “stereo maker”).
The available types are:
Enhancer: An Enhancer controls the overtone struc-
ture of the high frequencies, adding sparkle and
tightness to the sound.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
StDelay: Delay is an effect that allows you repeat the
input signal, thus creating echoes (repetition).
Mod Delay: This effect adds modulation to the
delayed sound, producing an effect similar to a
Flanger.
OD®Delay: This effect connects an Overdrive and a
Delay in series.
DS®Chors: This effect connects distortion and a
Chorus in series.
DS®Flger: This effect connects distortion and a
Flanger in series.
DS®Delay: This effect connects distortion and a
Delay in series.
EH®Chors: This effect connects an Enhancer and a
Chorus in series.
EH®Flger: This effect connects an Enhancer and a
Flanger in series.
3Tap Dly: The Triple Tap Delay produces three delay
sounds: center, left and right.
4Tap Dly: Delay with four repetition lines.
TmCtrDly: This effect controls the delay time and
pitch in realtime. Lengthening the delay time will
lower the pitch, and shortening it will raise the pitch.
Reverb: A nice Reverb effect.
GteRevNr: Gate Reverb is a special type of Reverb in
which the reverberant sound is suddenly cut off (and
does not gradually decrease).
GteRevRv: A gated Reverb effect that sounds “back-
wards”.
GteRevS1: The reverberant sound moves from right
to left.
GteRevS2: The reverberant sound moves from left to
right.
2PtchShf: A Pitch Shifter changes the pitch of the
original sound. This 2-voice effect contains two pitch
shifters and adds two transposed copies to the origi-
nal sound.
EH®Delay: This effect connects an Enhancer and a
Delay in series.
Cho®Dly: This effect connects a Chorus and a Delay
in series.
FL®Delay: This effect connects a Flanger and a
Delay in series.
Cho®Flger: This effect connects a Chorus and a
Flanger in series.
Cho/Delay: This effect connects a Chorus and a
Delay in parallel. (“Parallel” means that the input sig-
nal is processed by two effects that do not interact.)
FL/Delay: This effect connects a Flanger and a Delay
in parallel.
FbPtchShf: Pitch Shifter with several echoes.
OD®Chors: This effect connects an Overdrive and a
Chorus in series. (“Series” means that the output sig-
nal of the first effect is also processed by the second.)
OD®Flger: This effect connects an Overdrive and a
Flanger in series.
Cho/Flger: This effect connects a Chorus and a
Flanger in parallel.
(4) If you want to change other Mixer parame-
ters of the Upper part, press the
[Keyboard≈Effect] or [Back≈to≈Global] field.
If you don’t, press the [EXIT] button to return to
the main page.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with the Mixer & using effects
Linking Multi-FX type selection to the Upper part (Upper M-FX)
If you like, the DisCover 5 can automatically load the Multi-FX type that is suited for the Tone you assign to the
Upper part.
A good example of this is the selection of the
“Rotary” type for organ Tones. The status of the
Multi-FX (on or off) is also memorized and may thus
change. There may be times when you wish to
remain in control yourself. In that case, proceed as
follows:
(2) Press the [UTILITY] field.
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(3) Press the [Global] field in the upper left cor-
ner.
The display changes to:
(4) Press the [Upper≈M-FX] field (or select it with
the [PREV] [NEXT] buttons).
(5) Use the [VALUE] dial to toggle between
“Auto” and “Manual”.
Select “Auto” if the DisCover 5 should choose a
suitable Multi-FX type for each Tone you assign
to the Upper part.
Select “Manual” if you do not want the
Multi-FX to change automatically.
(6) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
Voice and Vocal Harmonizer part mixing
Your DisCover 5 provides three knobs ([VOICE], [HARMONY], and [EFFECTS]) that you can use without even bother-
ing about the MIXER environment. That is why there are fewer MIXER functions for this section, but a lot more
effects…
Note: For the following, it would be a good idea to set the
[EFFECTS] knob at least to “M” to hear what you are doing.
(2) Press the [Vocal≈Effect] field.
(1) Press the [MIXER/EFFECT] button.
A
B
The display changes to:
GAbout the VOICE & HARMONY columns
For the VOICE & HARMONY columns (marked
“A” and “B” in the above illustration), you will
notice a striking analogy with the button layout
in the VOCAL HARMONIZER pad.
The part names that can appear in the VOICE
column are: TALK, SINGER, VOICE-FX, or AUTO
TUNE. → Processors: Reverb, Delay
If it doesn’t, press the [EXIT] button until you see
this page.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
I Music Mute (only for TALK): Allows you to set
the balance between the music and your announce-
ments. The smaller the value, the softer the song’s
and Keyboard parts’ volume will be. Select “0” if you
do not want the music to be any softer than it
already is.
Now look at the front panel:
A
I Delay Send: Allows you to specify how strongly
the currently selected VOICE part should be pro-
cessed by Delay [1] of the VOCAL HARMONIZER sec-
tion.
B
Only one button in each row can be on at any
one time. It therefore makes sense to use one
set of effects processors for the upper row
(VOICE column), and a second for the lower row
(HARMONY column).
GHARMONY column
I Reverb Send: Allows you to specify how strongly
the currently selected HARMONY part should be pro-
cessed by Reverb [2] of the VOCAL HARMONIZER sec-
tion.
I Chorus Send: Allows you to specify how strongly
the currently selected HARMONY part should be pro-
cessed by the Chorus effect of the VOCAL HARMO-
NIZER section. (The VOICE section doesn’t have a
Chorus effect.)
I Delay Send: Allows you to specify how strongly
the currently selected HARMONY part should be pro-
cessed by Delay [2] of the VOCAL HARMONIZER sec-
tion.
The part names that can appear in the HAR-
MONY column are: VOCODER, SMALL, or
ENSEMBLE. → Processors: Reverb, Chorus,
Delay
The smaller names in the VOICE and HARMONY
columns reflect the current settings of the
VOCAL HARMONIZER section.
On the display page, TALK appears below VOICE.
If you look at the button illustration (left),
[TALK] currently lights. The same is true of the
VOCODER message in the display and the
[VOCODER] button on the front panel.
(5) Repeat the above for the remaining combi-
nations.
(3) Press the VOCAL HARMONIZER button of the
part whose settings you wish to change.
All settings for all VOCAL HARMONIZER buttons
are written to a User Program (page 80).
(4) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
(6) Set the MIC INPUT parameters as desired.
As explained under “Compressor, Gate, and
effects” (p. 21), the Compressor and Gate apply
to the MIC INPUT signal before it reaches the
VOCAL HARMONIZER section.
(7) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page, or continue with the next section to
program the effects processors.
GVOICE column
I Reverb Send: Allows you to specify how strongly
the currently selected VOICE part should be pro-
cessed by Reverb [1] of the VOCAL HARMONIZER sec-
tion.
Reverb, Delay, and Chorus effects
For the following, it is very important that you read (and understand) the explanations under “About the VOICE
& HARMONY columns” (p. 54).
Each Vocal Harmonizer part can have its own
effects settings. These settings change automati-
cally as you press [TALK], [VOICE–FX], [AUTO≈TUNE],
or [SINGER], on the one hand, and [VOCODER],
®
Extremely important remark
Before you even consider spending some time
with the Vocal Harmonizer effects, you need to
change the following parameter. If you don’t,
your changes will be lost as soon as you press
[SMALL], or [ENSEMBLE] on the other.
[TALK] can therefore use a short Reverb (“Room”, for
example), while [SINGER] can be processed with the
“Church” algorithm, and so on. Thus, by pressing
[VOICE-FX], you not only select that part and its
voice transformations, but also the Reverb and
following setting is remembered even after you
Delay settings you will (maybe) edit in a minute.
another VOCAL HARMONIZER button.
Do not change this setting if you are happy
with the way the effects sound and therefore
have no intention to delve into this matter. The
switch off your DisCover 5.
In fact, the Roland engineers already programmed
the effects parameters for you, so that you only
need to read on if you want to edit those presets
yourself.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with the Mixer & using effects
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(3) Press the [Effect≈Type] field.
(2) Press the [UTILITY] field.
(4) Decide which effects processor you wish to
edit:
• To edit a VOICE effect, press the [Reverb] or
[Delay] field below “VOICE EFFECT”.
• To edit a HARMONY effect, press [Reverb],
[Chorus], or [Delay] below “HARMONY EFFECT”.
Only the HARMONY parts (Vocoder, Small,
Ensemble) have a Chorus processor. The param-
eters and presets for the Reverb and Delay pro-
cessors differ between the VOICE EFFECTS and
HARMONY EFFECTS sections.
If the above page is not displayed, press the
[Back≈to≈Global] field in the upper left corner.
(3) Press the [Harmonizer≈Effect] field.
(4) Use the [VALUE] dial to toggle between
“Auto” and “Manual”.
(5) Press the VOCAL HARMONIZER button for
which you want to program the effect and
talk/sing into the microphone while setting
the following parameters.
Select “Auto” to use the most suitable effects
presets for each preset.
Select “Manual” to leave the last effect settings
you made intact (and change them, if neces-
sary), then write them to a User Program
(page 80).
®
And now… the Vocal Harmonizer effects
(1) Press the [MIXER/EFFECT] button.
The display changes to:
If necessary, you can use the [VOICE] or
[HARMONY] knob to temporarily set the vol-
ume of the part you don’t want to hear to “0”.
Reverb
Reverb for VOICE EFFECTS
(2) Press the [Vocal≈Effect] field.
• Press the field of the Reverb type you wish to
use.
Note: The choice of the preset also affects the settings
of the parameters below. Always start by selecting the
type and then set the programmable parameters.
The names of these types ([Studio]~[Church]) are
probably self-explanatory. You may notice that
the Reverb character changes as you select dif-
ferent types.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter (knob icons) you wish to edit, and set
the desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
The four knob icons allow you to alter the
selected Delay type.
I Wall Type: This parameter determines the “bright-
ness” and “liveness” of the effect. (Carpet, Wood,
Brick, Concrete, Marble)
The three knob icons allow you to alter the
selected Reverb type.
I Delay Send: This parameter reflects the setting on
the Vocal Mixer page. It was provided so that you do
not need to switch pages while editing the Delay
processor.
I Delay Time: Allows you to set the “time lag”
between the original and the effect signal. Combined
with the “Dly Feedback” parameter, it sets the speed
of the repetitions (echoes).
I Wall Type: Allows you to specify the surface of
the walls in the simulated location. This parameter
determines the “brightness” and “liveness” of the
effect. (Carpet, Wood, Brick, Concrete, Marble)
I Reverb Send: This parameter reflects the setting
on the Vocal Mixer page. It was provided so that you
do not need to switch pages while editing the Reverb
processor.
I Delay®Rev Send: This parameter sets the
amount of Delay sound that is sent to the Reverb.
Higher values mean that the Delay portion will be
more prominent in the Reverb signal. Be careful not
to overdo this effect, because it tends to blur the
sound image.
I Reverb Time: Allows you to set the length (dura-
tion) of the Reverb effect if you do not agree with
the “pre-setting”.
Reverb for HARMONY EFFECTS
I Dly Feedback: This parameter specifies the num-
ber of times the Delay will repeat. With a value of “0”,
the Delay will not repeat, while higher values
increase the number of repeats. With negative (–)
values, the Delay will be fed back with inverted
phase. Negative values are mainly effective with
short Delay times.
Delay for HARMONY EFFECTS
Except for the presets, this processor works
exactly like its VOICE namesake.
Delay
Delay for VOICE EFFECTS
The presets on this page are different, while
there is also one more parameter you can set
(see above for the others):
I Delay®Cho Send: Sets the amount of Delay
sound that is sent to the Chorus. Higher values mean
that the Delay portion will be more prominent in the
Chorus signal.
• Press the field of the Delay type you wish to
use.
Chorus (HARMONY EFFECTS)
Note: The choice of the preset also affects the settings
of the parameters below. Always start by selecting the
type and then set the programmable parameters.
The names of these types ([Slow]~[Space]) are
probably self-explanatory. You may notice that
the Delay character changes as you select dif-
ferent types. Also note that some Delays are
stereo. [Bubble] and [Space] are “special” effects
you probably only need every so often.
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter (knob icons) you wish to edit, and set
the desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
• Press the field of the Chorus type you wish to
use.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with the Mixer & using effects
Note: The choice of the preset also affects the settings
of the parameters below. Always start by selecting the
type and then set the programmable parameters.
(6) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
The names of these types ([Smooth]~[Celeste])
are probably self-explanatory. You may notice
that the Chorus character changes as you select
different types.
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter (knob icons) you wish to edit, and set
the desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
Note: The first thing to do now is probably to write
your settings to a User Program (page 80).
Note: For certain parts, there is also an equalizer. See
pages 62 and 65 for how to set them.
The three knob icons allow you to alter the
selected Chorus type.
I Low Pass Filter: A low-pass filter can be applied
to the sound sent to the Chorus to cut the high fre-
quency range. Higher values will cut more of the
high frequencies, resulting in a more mellow Chorus
sound.
I Chorus Send: This parameter reflects the setting
on the Vocal Mixer page. It was provided so that you
do not need to switch pages while editing the Chorus
processor.
I Cho® Rev Send: This parameter sets the amount
of Chorus sound that will be sent to the Reverb.
Higher values result in more Chorus sound being
sent. The value “90” effectively allows you to connect
the Chorus and Reverb effects in series (Chorus
before Reverb). If you do not wish the Chorus signal
to be processed by the Reverb effect, set this value to
“0”.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
7. Editing the Keyboard & Vocal Harmonizer parts
Editing the Keyboard parts (Sound Edit)
After selecting the desired Tones (or Drum Set) for the Keyboard parts –and probably before setting the Mixer
parameters proper– you may want to change certain aspects so as to adapt them to your music. In fact, this adds
“producing” to the mere mixing discussed earlier…
(1) Press the [MIXER/EFFECT] button.
If you press [Upper] or [Lower], the display looks
like the page shown above. If you press
[M.Drums], the display looks slightly different.
See below.
(5) The [Reset] field allows you to select the
default value (usually “0”) for the currently
selected parameter.
(6) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
The display changes to:
I Cutoff: This filter parameter allows you to make
the selected sound darker or brighter. Positive Cutoff
settings mean that more overtones are allowed to
pass, so that the sound becomes brighter. The fur-
ther this value is set in the negative direction, the
fewer overtones will be allowed to pass, and the
sound will become softer (darker).
If it does not, you may have to press the
[Keyboard≈Effect] (if available) and/or
[Back≈to≈Global] field at the bottom of the dis-
play.
Low-pass filter (LPF)
Low pass filter characteristics
Level
Level
(If a page with a [Sound≈Edit] field is displayed
right away, you can skip steps (2) and (3).)
Frequency
Frequency
Cutoff value
Cutoff frequency
(2) Press the [Keyboard≈Effect] field.
Note: For some sounds, positive (+) Cutoff settings may
cause no noticeable change, because the pre-pro-
grammed Cutoff parameter is already set to its maxi-
mum value.
I Resonance: This is a parameter one invariably
associates with a synthesizer. When the Resonance
value is increased, the overtones in the area of the
cutoff frequency will be emphasized, creating a
sound with a strong character.
Note: For some sounds, negative (–) Resonance settings
may produce no noticeable change because the Reso-
nance is already set to the minimum value.
(3) Press the [Sound≈Edit] field.
The following parameters allow you to set the Tone’s
“envelope”. The volume of an instrument changes
with time, from the moment the note begins to
sound to when it disappears. The envelope shape is
unique to each instrument, and is an important ele-
ment in how we distinguish the sounds we hear.
The envelopes of musical instrument sounds can
change depending on how the instrument is played.
For example if a trumpet is played sharply and
strongly, the attack will be quick and the sound will
be sharp. But if a trumpet is played lightly and softly,
the attack will be softer.
(4) Press the field that corresponds to the Key-
board part you wish to edit ([Upper], [Lower],
[M.Drums], upper right).
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Keyboard & Vocal Harmonizer parts
The envelope parameters affect both the volume (or
amplitude) and the filter.
®
If you press [M.Drums]…
…you can edit the Drum Set assigned to the
M.Drums part as a whole.
Volume
Volume
Sound ends
Sound ends
Sustain
Time
Time
Attack
Decay
Release
This is where
This is where you
This is where a
This is where that
you play a note
release the key
note is played.
note is released.
(Note-on)
(Note-off)
I Attack: This parameter adjusts the onset of the
sound. Negative values speed up the attack, so that
the sound becomes more aggressive.
I Decay: This parameter adjusts the time over
which the sound will fall from the highest point of
the attack down to the sustain level.
Note: Percussive sounds usually have a Sustain level of
“0”. Piano and guitar sounds are in this category. Hold-
ing the notes for a long time will thus have little effect
on their duration.
The [Reset] field allows you to select the default
value (usually “0”) for the currently selected
parameter.
I Cutoff: Allows you to make the Drum Set (all
instruments) brighter (positive values) or darker
(negative values). The further this value is set in the
negative direction, the fewer overtones will be
allowed to pass, and the sound will become softer
(darker).
I Resonance: This parameter allows you to add a
“synthetic” character to your Drum Sets (choose a
positive value), or to make it sound more natural.
Note: It would be a good idea to save these settings to
a User Program (page 80).
I Release: This parameter adjusts the time over
which the sound will decay after the note is released
until it is no longer heard. The cutoff frequency also
falls according to this setting.
Vibrato is an effect created by modulating the pitch.
It makes the sound more expressive. Use the follow-
ing three parameters if you think the part in question
has too much (or could use a little more) vibrato.
Note: Some “V” Tones contain natural (sampled) vibrato
whose depth or speed cannot be changed.
I Vibrato Rate: This parameter adjusts the speed of
the pitch modulation. Positive (+) settings make the
preset pitch modulation faster, and negative (–) set-
tings make it slower.
I Vibrato Depth: Sets the intensity of the pitch
modulation. Positive (+) settings mean that the
“wobble” becomes more prominent, while negative
(–) settings make it shallower.
I Vibrato Delay: This parameter adjusts the time
required for the vibrato effect to begin. Positive (+)
settings increase the delay, and negative settings
shorten it.
(7) Press the [Back≈to≈Kbd≈Eff] field to return to
the Keyboard Mixer page.
Note: It would be a good idea to save these settings to
a User Program (page 80).
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Editing the Vocal Harmonizer parts
Apart from the effects settings discussed earlier, there are also other VOCAL HARMONIZER settings that can be cus-
tomized. There are additional parameters for all Vocal Harmonizer Parts except the TALK option.
Procedure for selecting these pages
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(3) In the right column, press the field that cor-
responds to the VOCAL HARMONIZER part
you wish to edit.
You could also press and hold the correspond-
ing button on the front panel.
It might be a good idea to connect a micro-
phone and to sing/talk while making the fol-
lowing settings.
(2) On the MENU page that appears now, press
the [VOCAL≈HARMONIZER] field.
Singer settings
When the [SINGER] button lights, your solo singing
GIf you press the [Edit] field…
is output.
…the display looks as follows:
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
(1) Press the [Male] or [Female] field.
This is an important indication for the HAR-
MONY processor (Vocoder, Small or Ensemble).
It does not change the character of your live
singing, though.
For the following, the [Vibrato] indicator icon
must be white for the effect to be noticeable.
Press the field that corresponds to your voice
type. That way, the added harmony voices will
sound even more convincing.
I Vibrato Rate: Sets the speed of the vibrato effect.
I Vibrato Depth: Allows you to set the vibrato
intensity. Vibrato is an effect that changes (“modu-
lates”) the pitch. The higher the Depth value, the
more outspoken these periodic pitch changes will be.
I Rise Time: Allows you to set a swell for the vibrato
effect. This parameter specifies how long it takes
before the Depth value is reached – once the Delay
Time is up.
(2) Press the [Vibrato] field to add an automatic
Vibrato effect to your singing.
Note that this is probably only useful as gim-
mick: your natural vibrato no doubt sounds far
more… natural. The Vibrato parameters can be
set on the Edit page.
(3) When you are done, either press the [EXIT]
button to return to the main page, or one of
the other fields in the right column to set
I Delay Time: Allows you to set a delay between the
moment you start singing and the moment the
vibrato effect kicks in.
those parameters as well.
Note: The [Vocal≈Effect] and [Equalizer] fields allow you
to jump to the effects or tone controls.
• Press [EXIT] (or [Back≈to≈Singer]) to leave this
page.
GIf you press the [Equalizer] field…
…the Vocal Equalizer page appears. It contains
a simple equalizer for the Voice-FX, Auto Tune
and Singer parts. See above.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Keyboard & Vocal Harmonizer parts
Voice-FX settings
When the [VOICE-FX] button lights, your original
voice will not be output by the Vocal Harmonizer.
Instead, it will be changed (transformed) according
to the preset you select here.
For the following, the [Vibrato] indicator icon
must be white for the effect to be noticeable.
I Vibrato Rate: Sets the speed of the vibrato effect.
I Vibrato Depth: Allows you to set the vibrato
intensity. Vibrato is an effect that changes (“modu-
lates”) the pitch. The higher the Depth value, the
more outspoken these periodic pitch changes will be.
I Rise Time: Allows you to set a swell for the vibrato
effect. This parameter specifies how long it takes
before the Depth value is reached – once the Delay
Time is up.
I Delay Time: Allows you to set a delay between the
moment you start singing and the moment the
vibrato effect kicks in.
• Press [EXIT] to leave this page (or [Back≈to≈V-FX]
if you want to select another preset).
Note: If you select another preset, the Pitch and Vibrato
parameters on the Edit page are reset to their factory
values.
(1) Press one of the 12 fields in the middle to
select the kind of transformation you want.
(2) Press the [Vibrato] field to add an automatic
Vibrato effect to the transformed voice.
The Vibrato parameters can be set on the Edit
page.
GIf you press the [Equalizer] field…
…the display looks as follows:
(3) When you are done, either press the [EXIT]
button to return to the main page, or one of
the other fields in the right column to set
those parameters as well.
Note: The [Vocal≈Effect] and [Equalizer] fields allow you
to jump to the effects or tone controls.
GIf you press the [Edit] field…
…the display looks as follows:
This page contains a simple equalizer for the
Voice-FX, Auto Tune and Singer parts.
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
[Equalizer] Press this field to switch the equalizer of
the corresponding part on or off. The parameter set-
tings of that column are only used if the [Equalizer]
indicator icon lights.
The equalizer can be used for two things: (a) empha-
sizing a specific frequency range to create a special
effect or make the part more distinguishable; (b) to
reduce the level of frequencies that mask other
sounds or produce a “boomy” sound.
I Frequency Hz: Use this parameter to select the
frequency whose level you wish to change with the
Gain parameter. The smaller the value, the lower the
frequency that will be boosted or cut.
I Gain: This parameter sets the level of the selected
frequency. “0” means that the frequency’s level does
not change (no difference between equalizer on and
off).
Note: Be sure to select the desired preset before press-
ing the [Edit] field and modifying the following parame-
ters.
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
Here’s what the parameters mean:
I Gender: Allows you to change the timbre of the
part. Negative values produce a “masculine” effect,
positive values add “feminine” qualities.
This parameter should be set in relation to the Coarse
parameter (if you want to achieve a realistic effect).
I Pitch Coarse: Allows you to transpose the pro-
cessed voice signal in semitone steps. “12” corre-
sponds to 1 octave, “24” to 2 octaves.
• Press [EXIT] (or [Back≈to≈VocalH]) to leave this
page.
I Pitch Fine: Allows you to change the tuning of
the processed voice in very small (cent) steps.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Auto Tune settings
When the [AUTO≈TUNE] button lights, only the words you say will be used. The melody for these words is gener-
ated by the Vocal Harmonizer. This is similar to the Vocoder part, except that Auto Tune is monophonic (and thus
meant as “solo voice”).
Here’s what the parameters mean:
I Gender: Allows you to change the timbre of the
part. Negative values produce a “masculine” effect,
positive values add “feminine” qualities.
I Portamento Time & [Portamento]: See page 25.
I Vibrato Rate, Depth, Rise Time, Delay Time:
These are the same parameters as for the Voice-FX
part. See therefore page 62. This time, however, they
apply to the Auto Tune part.
Note: The [Vibrato] indicator icon must be white for the
Vibrato effect to be noticeable.
(1) Press the [Vibrato] field to add an automatic
Vibrato effect to the generated voice.
The Vibrato parameters can be set on the Edit
page.
• Press [EXIT] (or [Back≈to≈A-Tune]) to leave this
page.
GIf you press the [Equalizer] field…
…the Vocal Equalizer page appears. It contains a
simple equalizer for the Voice-FX, Auto Tune
and Singer parts. See above.
I OCTAVE: If you are not happy with the register of
the generated voice, you can transpose it up or down
by up to 2 octaves.
(2) Set the desired “Track” value with the [VALUE]
dial.
I Track: This is where you select the track that
should supply the note information for the melody
to be generated. In most instances “4” is a good
choice, because that track usually contains the mel-
ody.
Note: Use the Minus One function to mute the selected
track if it should not be played alongside the generated
vocal part. See page 19 for details.
Press the [Left] and/or [Right] field if you want to use
the melody you play on the keyboard. The “divide”
between Left and Right follows the Split point set-
ting (see p. 32).
(3) When you are done, either press the [EXIT]
button to return to the main page, or one of
the other fields in the right column to set
those parameters as well.
Note: The [Vocal≈Effect] and [Equalizer] fields allow you
to jump to the effects or tone controls.
GIf you press the [Edit] field…
…the display looks as follows:
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Keyboard & Vocal Harmonizer parts
Vocoder settings
The Vocoder page is the first page that is related to voices that are added to your (or the DisCover 5’s) singing
(Voice-FX, Auto Tune or Singer).
When the [VOCODER] button lights, “synthetic” har-
monies are added to your singing, whereby the
words you say are used to change the timbre of the
sound used as “carrier”. Unlike the Auto Tune func-
tion, the Vocoder is polyphonic and can generate up
to four harmony voices.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
I Gender: Allows you to change the timbre of the
part. Negative values produce a “masculine” effect,
positive values add “feminine” qualities.
I PanPot: Allows you to set the placement of the
corresponding part in the stereo sound image. This is
only meaningful if you connect the DisCover 5 to a
stereo amplifier. “64” corresponds to the center, the
values 0~63 to the left side (“0” being far left), and
65~127 to the right side (“127” being far right).
I Volume: Allows you to set the level of the corre-
sponding part. Be aware that even the maximum
value produces no audible effect if the [HARMONY]
knob is set all the way to “MIN”.
GPress the [Common] field to jump to the fol-
lowing page.
(1) In the GENDER column (left), press the field
that corresponds to the kind of “synthesizer
choir” you want to add to your singing.
Press [Male] for a darker character, or [Female] if
the Vocoder signals should be reminiscent of
female voices. Press [Mix] to create a mixed
choir.
The field you press here determines what pre-
sets are available. See also page 26.
Note: The [Vocal≈Effect] and [Equalizer] fields allow you
to jump to the effects or tone controls.
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
GIf you press the [Edit] field…
…the display looks as follows:
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
• Press the [Portamento] field to switch this effect
on. “Portamento” means that the pitch doesn’t
change in clearly defined steps: it produces
glides from one note to the next.
I Portamento Time: Use this parameter to specify
the speed at which the glides are carried out. The
higher the value, the slower the transitions.
I Random Tuning: This parameter allows you to
introduce subtle (or not-so-subtle) pitch inaccuracies
usually associated with analog synthesizers. Irrespec-
tive of the choice you make here (Low, Middle, High),
the effect will be noticeable, but never overly dra-
matic. Select “Off” if you do not need this effect.
This is not the same as a vibrato effect, because it
only affects the onset of the notes. There is thus no
periodic modulation of the pitch. And “Random”
means that the exact detuning is unpredictable and
therefore changes with every chord the Vocoder pro-
cesses.
This page also appears when you press the
[Part≈1–4] field on the Common page (see
below).
The note icons next to the Part 1~4 entries
indicate the Vocoder parts that are currently
playing. This may help you to decide which part
needs to be corrected.
As a rule, the Vocoder works as follows: the
lowest note played by the selected song part or
yourself is assigned to “Part 1”, while the high-
est is assigned to “Part 4”. So always start edit-
ing “from bottom to top”.
I Note Wrap: Activate this field if the Vocoder
notes should remain within a “natural” range. If it is
off, some notes may sound too high or too low.
I Octave: This parameter allows you to transpose
the Vocoder in octave steps.
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
• Press [EXIT] or [Back≈to≈Vocoder] to leave this
page, or [Part≈1–4] for even more control over
the Vocoder effect.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
[Equalizer] Press this field to switch all equalizers on
this page on or off. The equalizer can be used for two
things: (a) emphasizing a specific frequency range to
create a special effect or make the part more distin-
guishable; (b) to reduce the level of frequencies that
mask other sounds or produce a “boomy” sound.
I Frequency Hz: Use this parameter to select the
frequency whose level you wish to change with the
Gain parameter. The smaller the value, the lower the
frequency that will be boosted or cut.
GIf you press the [Equalizer] field…
…the display looks as follows:
I Gain: This parameter sets the level of the selected
frequency. “0” means that the frequency’s level does
not change (no difference between equalizer on and
off).
This page contains a simple equalizer for each
separate Vocoder part, as well as an EQ band
that applies to all four voices simultaneously
for added flexibility. These are connected in
series.
• Press [EXIT] (or [Back≈to≈VocalH]) to leave this
page.
Note: When one of the Vocal Equalizers is on (page 62),
the Vocoder, Small and Ensemble parts lose one voice
(so that 3 voices are available for Vocoder and Ensemble,
and 1 for Small).
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
Small settings
I Harmony Voice Assign: See “Who specifies the
harmonies?” (p. 23).
When the [SMALL] button lights, two-part harmo-
nies are added to your singing. This page allows you
to specify what kinds of voices will be used for these
harmonies.
I Octave (–1~1): This parameter allows you to
transpose the harmony voices one octave up or
down. Use it if you think the arrangement
becomes a bit “cluttered”, or to achieve a spe-
cial effect.
GIf you press the [Edit] field…
(1) In the GENDER column (left), press the field
that corresponds to the kind of choir you
want to add to your singing.
Press [Male] for a man’s choir, or [Female] for
female voices. Press [Mix] to create a mixed
choir. The field you press here determines what
presets are available. The choice of the preset
sets the number of voices (1 or 2) that will be
added.
Note: For an optimum effect, be sure to set the GEN-
DER VOICE INPUT parameter to match your voice type.
See page 61.
(You can also select this page by pressing the
[Part≈1-2] field on the “Common” page, see
below.)
As a rule, the SMALL harmony system works as
follows: the lowest note played by the selected
song part or yourself is assigned to “Part 1”,
while the second is assigned to “Part 2”.
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
(2) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing the Keyboard & Vocal Harmonizer parts
I Gender: Allows you to change the timbre of the
part. Negative values produce a “masculine” effect,
positive values add “feminine” qualities.
GIf you press the [Equalizer] field…
…the display looks as follows:
I PanPot: Allows you to set the placement of the
corresponding part in the stereo sound image. This is
only meaningful if you connect the DisCover 5 to a
stereo amplifier. “64” corresponds to the center, the
values 0~63 to the left side (“0” being far left), and
65~127 to the right side (“127” being far right).
I Volume: Allows you to set the level of the corre-
sponding part. Be aware that even the highest value
produces no audible effect if the [HARMONY] knob is
set all the way to “MIN”.
GPress the [Common] field to jump to the fol-
lowing page.
This page contains a simple equalizer for either
SMALL part, as well as an EQ band that applies
to both voices simultaneously for additional
flexibility.
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
[Equalizer] Press this field to switch all equalizers on
this page on or off. The equalizer can be used for two
things: (a) emphasizing a specific frequency range to
create a special effect or make the part more distin-
guishable; (b) to reduce the level of frequencies that
mask other sounds or produce a “boomy” sound.
I Frequency Hz: Use this parameter to select the
frequency whose level you wish to change with the
Gain parameter. The smaller the value, the lower the
frequency that will be boosted or cut.
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
• Press the [Portamento] field to switch this effect
on. “Portamento” means that the pitch doesn’t
change in clearly defined steps: it produces
glides from one note to the next.
I Portamento Time: Use this parameter to specify
the speed at which the glides are carried out. The
higher the value, the slower the transitions.
I Gain: This parameter sets the level of the selected
frequency. “0” means that the frequency’s level does
not change (no difference between equalizer on and
off).
• Press [EXIT] (or [Back≈to≈VocalH]) to leave this
I Random Tuning: This parameter allows you to
introduce subtle (or not-so-subtle) pitch inaccuracies
usually associated with analog synthesizers. Irrespec-
tive of the choice you make here (Low, Middle, High),
the effect will be noticeable, but never overly dra-
matic. Select “Off” if you do not need this effect.
I Chord Intell: The Vocal Harmonizer usually orga-
nizes the added voices in a musically logical way
(making them suitable for jazz, ballads, etc.). Switch
this parameter on if you wish to obtain natural voic-
ings for the harmony parts added to your voice.
page.
Note: When one of the Vocal Equalizers is on (page 62),
the Vocoder, Small and Ensemble parts lose one voice
(so that 3 voices are available for Vocoder and Ensem-
ble, and 1 for Small).
• Press [EXIT] or [Back≈to≈Small] to leave this page,
or [Part≈1–2] for even more control over the
Small effect.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Ensemble settings
When the [ENSEMBLE] button lights, four-part har-
monies are added to your singing. This page allows
you to specify what kinds of voices will be used for
these harmonies.
GIf you press the [Equalizer] field…
…the display looks as follows:
This page contains a simple equalizer for the
four ENSEMBLE parts, as well as an EQ band
that applies to all four voices simultaneously
for added flexibility.
With the exception of the fact that up to four
voices are generated, the parameters and fields
on this page work exactly like for “Small”, so
please see above.
Note: The [Vocal≈Effect] and [Equalizer] fields allow you
to jump to the effects or tone controls.
• Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select the
parameter you wish to edit, and set the desired
value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
GIf you press the [Edit] field…
[Equalizer] Press this field to switch all equalizers on
this page on or off. The equalizer can be used for two
things: (a) emphasizing a specific frequency range to
create a special effect or make the part more distin-
guishable; (b) to reduce the level of frequencies that
mask other sounds or produce a “boomy” sound.
I Frequency Hz: Use this parameter to select the
frequency whose level you wish to change with the
Gain parameter. The smaller the value, the lower the
frequency that will be boosted or cut.
I Gain: This parameter sets the level of the selected
frequency. “0” means that the frequency’s level does
not change (no difference between equalizer on and
off for that particular part, or the overall EQ band).
See page 64. This page can also be selected via
the [Part≈1–4] field on the Common page.
GIf you press the [Common] field…
…the display looks as follows:
• Press [EXIT] (or [Back≈to≈VocalH]) to leave this
page.
Note: When one of the Vocal Equalizers is on (page 62),
the Vocoder, Small and Ensemble parts lose one voice
(so that 3 voices are available for Vocoder and Ensem-
ble, and 1 for Small).
See the explanations under “Small settings”.
• Press [EXIT] or [Back≈to≈Ensembl] to leave this
page, or [Part≈1-4] for even more control over
the Ensemble effect.
• Press the [Common] field to return to the previ-
ous page.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More refined song functions
8. More refined song functions
Let us now take a look at additional and more refined functions you can use for song playback.
Using the Fade-In/Out function
The [FADE] button can be used for two things,
depending on whether you press it before or during
song playback:
If you think the Fade-In or Fade-Out takes too
much time, here’s how to change it:
(1) Press and hold the [FADE] button.
The display changes to:
GIf pressed while playback is stopped
The [FADE] button flashes until you press the
[®÷ª] button, and the Fade-In starts.
Fading in means that the volume of both the
song and Keyboard parts (but neither the Vocal
Harmonizer signal, nor your voice) gradually
increases, giving the impression that you have
been playing for a long time before the music
becomes audible. The volume is automatically
set to zero and then gradually increased to the
value specified with the [VOLUME] knob. When
the Fade In is completed, the [FADE] button
goes dark.
(2) Press the field that provides access to the
parameter you wish to change.
Press [Time≈IN] to change the Fade-In time (0~
20 seconds).
Press [Time≈OUT] to change the Fade-Out time
(0~20 seconds).
Press [Time≈HOLD] to set how long it takes for
the volume to return to the [VOLUME] setting
(0~10 seconds) after completing the fade-out.
Do not select too short a value, because that
might produce highly unprofessional level
jumps.
GIf pressed while playback is running
The [FADE] button flashes and the volume grad-
ually decreases until it reaches zero (button
lights steadily). This is called a Fade-Out.
Fade Outs are extremely popular in pop music,
and the DisCover 5 allows you to end a song
just like the original.
(3) Use the [VALUE] dial to set the desired value.
(4) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page, or [Back≈to≈Menu] to return to the
menu.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Programming MARK JUMP locations
All songs on the supplied SmartMedia card come with four locations already memorized that can be selected by
pressing MARK JUMP [1]~[4] (page 17).
Editing and programming MARK JUMP locations
can be carried out as follows:
Repeat steps (2)~(4) to program new locations
for the remaining MARK JUMP buttons.
(5) Press the [Remove] field to clear the measure
indication of the selected MARK JUMP but-
ton.
(1) Press and hold a MARK JUMP button [1]~[4].
MARK JUMP buttons for which a location has
been programmed light.
Pressing a MARK JUMP button for which no
measure location has been entered (in which
case the indicator does not light) has no effect.
Press whichever button you like. The display
changes to:
Want to save time? Here’s the quickest way to pro-
gram MARK JUMP locations:
• Select the song you want to program MARK loca-
tions for.
• Select the Mark Jump Edit page (see above).
• Press [|√] to return to the beginning of the song,
then [®÷ª] to start playback.
• Press the [1] field to select it.
• Press the [MARK] field where you want the first
marker to be. This position is memorized.
• Press the [NEXT] button (below the [VALUE] dial)
to select memory [2].
• Press the [MARK] field where you want the sec-
ond marker to be.
• Repeat the previous two steps for memories [3]
and [4].
(2) Press the field that corresponds to the MARK
JUMP button for which you wish to program
a different location (1~4).
• Continue with step (6).
The following can be done both during play-
back and while it is stopped.
(3) Do one of the following:
(6) Press the [Save] field.
• Press the [Current≈MEASURE] field. This inserts
the number of the current measure in the white
field.
• Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired
measure number. Press [Delete] to dispose of the
last number you entered.
Example: if you wanted to enter “14” and then
notice that you pressed the [4] field twice
(“144”), press [Delete] to get rid of the second
“4”.
As soon as you enter a new value, an [EDIT]
message appears next to the memory number:
The MARK JUMP locations are additional infor-
mation for song files that need to be saved to
floppy disk or SmartMedia card.
(7) If necessary, change the song’s name.
You only need to do this if you want to preserve
the original version. The MARK JUMP informa-
tion can only be read by the DisCover 5, and so
is of little use to other sequencers or SMF play-
ers: they simply ignore it. So you might as well
save the song under its original name. Besides,
you can also save the song to a different card or
disk.
(4) Press the [MARK] field to confirm your set-
See page 29 for how to enter a different name.
ting.
The [EDIT] message disappears.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More refined song functions
(8) Press the [SMART≈MEDIA] or [FLOPPY] field to
• Press the [REPLACE] field to overwrite the old
version.
select the Save destination.
Press the [EXIT] button on the DisCover 5’s front
panel if you do not want to overwrite this song
and return to the previous page. Then enter a
different name (or select a different media).
(9) Press the [EXECUTE] field.
If you selected the drive that contains the orig-
inal version, the following message is displayed:
If the song doesn’t yet exist on the selected
SmartMedia card or floppy disk, the data are
saved, and the following message appears:
If you pressed the [FLOPPY] field, the message
reads “SAME NAME ON DISK”.
Working with the Song Finder
You already know the main aspects of the Song Finder, so let’s have a more detailed look at it.
The Song Finder is used for quickly locating the
songs you want to play back. You will see in a
minute that it is far more powerful when you work
with SmartMedia cards than when you work with
floppy disks.
If you press [SMART≈MEDIA]…
…the display changes to:
(1) Press the [SONG/RHYTHM≈FINDER] button.
You can also press the [SONG] field in the upper
left corner of the display (if available) to select
songs.
“xx”: found entries.
“yy”: total number of songs
on the card.
Note: If no song list is displayed, please select “All” in
order to display all song file names.
(2) Press the [SMART≈MEDIA] or [FLOPPY] field in
the upper right corner.
The [Song≈Name], [Author], and [Genre] fields
allow you to sort songs on the SmartMedia card
in alphabetical order.
If you press [FLOPPY]…
… the display looks as follows:
This alphabetical sorting is determined by the
selected category. In the above example,
[Song≈Name] is selected.
(3) Press the [Rhythm] field to select drum pat-
terns.
The [Song≈Name] and [File≈Name] fields allow
you to select between a list of readily under-
standable song names and slightly more cryptic
file names (limited to 18 characters). Choose
whichever is more convenient.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
The “Rhythm” index provides access to 32
“drum songs”, which reside on the supplied
SmartMedia card. These SMF songs can assume
the role of a simple rhythm box.
• Use the MARK/JUMP buttons (see p. 69) for
stepping through the various “patterns” (intro,
verse, chorus, ending).
They only contain a drum part, which may
come in handy when you wish to play the
accompaniment yourself or when you are play-
ing with a bassist.
(4) After the above, press the [SONG] field to
return to all songs on the SmartMedia card.
(5) If available, press the field of the song you
need.
• Press the field of the rhythm accompaniment
you need.
If the name is not displayed, use [ø] or [˚] to go
to a different page. In the case of a SmartMedia
card, you can also use the following…
Locating files with the Song Finder
Allow us to once again remind you that the following is only available for SmartMedia cards.
a) Choose a category (Index)
c) Decide what you want to look for
The highest hierarchical level of the Song Finder
database is called “Index”. All search operations
apply to the selected Index (and therefore not
necessarily to all files on card).
• Press the [Song≈Name] field if you want the
DisCover 5 to look for song names, then enter
the name (or part of it).
• Press the [Author] field if you want to look for
an artist’s name, then enter the name (or part
of it).
• Press the [Index] field in the top left corner.
• Press the [Genre] field to locate a specific genre
(Rock’n’Roll, 16-Beat, etc.), then enter the
desired characters.
GEntering characters
Enter only as many characters as you think are
necessary to find the song you are after. The
character string you enter can be used in two
ways (see below).
• Use the [ø] and [˚] fields to select the position
for which you wish to enter a new character.
• Use the alphanumeric keypad in the right cor-
ner to enter the desired characters. This keypad
works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone:
you may have to press an alphanumeric field
several times to select the desired character or
• Either press the field that corresponds to the
desired song category, or –if you’re not sure
which category the song belongs to– press
[ALL]. (This may be a safer bet.)
• Now return to the previous page by pressing
[Back≈to≈SongList].
number.
Note: There is no [A/a] field here, because the Finder
makes no distinction between upper- and lower-case
letters.
b) Select the Finder
The powerful part starts as soon as you press
the [Finder] field.
• The [Delete] field allows you to delete the
inverted character.
• Press [Space] to insert a blank (or the number
“0”).
• If you forgot to insert a character, use [ø] or [˚]
to select the position where the missing char-
acter should be inserted. Then press [Insert], fol-
lowed by the character you wish to insert.
d) Search the database
The next step is to decide how the Song Finder
should look for the files:
• Press the [Alphabetic≈Order] field to search for
all entries that start with the characters you
entered (“BEA”, for example). Files that match
the specified criteria will be displayed at the top
of the list.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More refined song functions
The order depends on whether you entered the
name in the [Song≈Name], [Author], or [Genre]
field.
If the following message appears, the
DisCover 5 was unable to locate any files that
match the search criteria:
• Press the [Find≈Only] field to have the
DisCover 5 search the selected column for files
that contain the supplied information. (This
would allow you to also locate a file called
“Raggabeat” if you entered “BEA”.)
Note: See p. 16 for how to use the Play & Search func-
tion.
In that case all song names are listed (the “xx of
yy” entry lists twice the same number of files).
If the DisCover 5 did find one or several
matches, the “xx” number will be smaller than
the “yy” number.
• Press the field of the song you need and do
your thing.
Editing the Song Finder information
The Finder information is based on search criteria that are added to plain and simple Standard MIDI Files. The
information is therefore not contained in the files themselves and needs to be added for new files you copy to
your SmartMedia card. That is a process we call “editing”.
The database (which is a separate file) must be
managed and maintained on the DisCover 5.
You can copy files to a SmartMedia card on
your PC (provided you have the appropriate
device for that), but if you then insert the card
into the DisCover 5’s slot, the following mes-
Song Options
As you know, after pressing the [SONG≈FINDER]
button next to the display, followed by the
[SMART≈MEDIA] field, the display looks as fol-
lows:
sage appears:
The field in the lower left corner provides access
to a display page where you can add database
information to “known” files (see above). This
also works for songs that already contain
entries you wish to modify.
It means that the DisCover 5 found files for
which no Song Finder information is available.
• Press [Update≈the≈DATABASE] to make the new
files “DisCover 5 savvy”. This only adds the Song
Name – the rest must be entered manually (see
below).
Note: Depending on the number of songs you copied to
the SmartMedia card, this update may take some time.
But it’s worth it, so please be patient.
• Press the [Skip≈DATABASE≈Updating] field if you
do not wish to update the database now. In
that case, however, such new “PC songs” are
“invisible” to the Finder.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
(1) First select the song whose database informa-
tion you wish to change or edit by pressing
its field.
[NO] leaves the file intact and takes you back to
the initial Song Finder page with the song list.
[CANCEL] leaves the file intact and takes you
(2) Press the [Options] field.
back to the Song Options page.
Note: If a song you delete here is assigned to a Chain
step, an error message (“File not found”) is displayed
during playback of that Chain, and playback stops at
that step. So be careful.
GLyrics Mark
The [Insert] and [Remove] fields allow you to add
an icon (Insert) to song files that contain Lyrics
data for easy identification, or to delete
(Remove) that icon again. Here is an example of
what the icon looks like:
The name of the selected song as well as the
Author and Genre information (if available) are
displayed below the three options (Rename,
Delete, P&S Input).
(3) Now do one of the following:
GRename
This function allows you to change the Song
Name, Author, and/or Genre entry of the
selected song.
• Press the [Song≈Name], [Author], or [Genre] field
and enter the desired characters.
You can also rename all three of them.
GP&S Input
You can also add a musical phrase to your
songs if you wish to take advantage of the Play
& Search facility. See page 16 for how to use
that facility in a real-life situation. Here’s how
to program the phrase:
• Press the [Rename] field. The display responds
with:
(1) Press the [Options] field.
(2) Press the [P&S≈Input] field.
GDelete
This function allows you to delete the selected
song from the SmartMedia card.
• Check the name of the song. If you selected the
wrong song, press [Back≈toSongList] and correct
your selection.
• Press the [Delete] field. Deleting a song cannot
be undone, which is why the following question
is now displayed:
(3) Play the notes of the most characteristic
theme (the one you’ll be most likely to play
when using Play & Search for locating this
song).
The key and rhythm are of little importance.
(You must get the intervals right, though!) The
note boxes will display a quarter note for every
note you played. Five “note boxes” thus mean
that you played five notes.
(4) If you make a mistake, proceed as follows to
correct it:
Press the [Delete≈Last≈Note] field if you only
wish to correct the last note you entered.
[YES] deletes the song file.
Press [Reset] to erase all notes you have played
so far. Then play the notes again.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More refined song functions
(5) Press the [EXECUTE] field to save this informa-
(4) Press the field of the Index category you wish
to edit.
tion to SmartMedia card.
Songs for which there is Play & Search informa-
tion are flagged with a note symbol (ꢀ ) to the
left of their names.
(5) Select the edit function you need by pressing
its field:
Note: The Play & Search function is Database informa-
tion that is not part of the songs themselves. It resides
in a different area on the SmartMedia card.
GRename
This function allows you to change the name of
the selected Index.
Editing an Index
All songs on the supplied SmartMedia card are
already assigned to one of the eight categories.
You can change those assignments and even
edit the Index names. Furthermore, you can
copy an Index entry (along with all its song
assignments) to a different entry.
• Press the [Rename] field.
(1) Press the [SONG≈FINDER] button.
• Enter the new name (16 characters). See
“Entering characters” (p. 71).
• Press the [EXECUTE] field to confirm the new
name.
You can also press the [SONG] field in the upper
left corner of the display (if available) to select
songs.
(2) Press the [SMART≈MEDIA] field in the upper
right corner.
(3) Press the [Index] field in the top left corner.
If the [ALL] field is currently selected, the dis-
play looks as follows:
GEdit
This function allows you to assign the desired
songs to the selected Index (or to remove exist-
ing song assignments).
• After performing step (4) above, press the [Edit]
field.
The Index Edit functions are only available for
“real” Index categories, so…
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
• Use the [Finder], [Song≈Name], [Author], and
[Genre] fields to locate the desired file. See
page 71.
• Press the fields of all songs you wish to assign
to the selected Index category (“Ball Room” in
the above example).
Press [Merge] if the song assignments of the
SOURCE category should be added to the
assignments of the DESTINATIONS Index. This
means that the DESTINATIONS category will
contain more assignments than before.
Your command is briefly confirmed by the dis-
play:
Selected songs are displayed on a white back-
ground.
To remove a song from the selected category,
press its white field, so that it turns white.
• If necessary, use the [ø] [˚] fields to go to previ-
ous or subsequent list pages.
• Press [Back≈to≈Index] to confirm your changes
and return to the previous page. Press [EXIT] to
return to the master page and to cancel your
changes (which means that the assignments
Note: No song files are copied during this operation.
you have just changed will be lost).
Note: After 50 modifications (established/defeated
assignments), the DisCover 5 performs an automatic
confirmation (like when you press the [Back≈to≈Index]
field).
(6) Press the [Back≈to≈Index] field to return to the
Index page.
The message “Executing” appears.
Note: Press the [EXIT] button to return to the master
page and cancel your changes.
GCopy
This function allows you to copy one Index cat-
egory (along with all the song assignments) to a
another category. You could take advantage of
this for merging two categories so as to free up
one category for new assignments.
Note: There are eight Index categories in all. You cannot
create additional categories.
• After performing step (4) above, press the
[Copy] field.
• In the left column (SOURCE), press the field
whose assignments you wish to copy to
another Index category.
• In the right column (DESTINATIONS), press the
field of the index category you wish to copy the
assignments to.
Note: For safety reasons, the [Rhythm] category cannot
be edited here.
• Now select the method used for copying the
song assignments:
Press the [Replace] field if the assignments of
the DESTINATIONS Index should be erased and
replaced by the entries of the selected SOURCE
field.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More refined song functions
Song Chain function
The Chain function allows you to prepare play lists of all the songs you want to use during a performance. The
advantage of working with song chains is that you do not need to select files between songs.
Programming Song Chains
(1) Insert the SmartMedia™ card that contains
(4) Press the [Song≈List] field.
the desired songs into the slot.
Note: The Chain function is only available for songs on
SmartMedia card – and only for one such card at a time.
You may therefore have to copy all desired songs to that
card before proceeding. See page 109 for details.
(2) Press the [CHAIN] button.
(5) Locate the song you wish to assign to step 01.
• If it is already displayed, continue with step (6)
below.
The display looks more or less as follows:
• If it is not yet displayed, use the [ø] [˚] fields in
the lower right of the display to change pages.
• You can also use the following fields for nar-
rowing down your search if you are over-
whelmed by the number of songs (and pages
you need to scroll): [Index], [Song≈Name],
[Author], [Genre], and [Finder]. See page 71.
(6) Select the song you wish to assign by press-
ing its field (so that it is displayed in white).
(7) Press the [ENTER] field.
The long fields refer to the names of the Song
Chains already available on the inserted Smart-
Media card.
This takes you back to the following page. The
song is assigned to step 01, and step 02
becomes the last one of your chain (*End*):
(3) Press the [Make≈New≈Chain] field in the upper
right corner.
The [02≈*End*] field is selected automatically, so
you can assign a song to it right away.
You have just created a new Chain. Chains con-
sist of “steps” (up to 99) to which you can
assign one song each.
(8) Repeat steps (4)~(7) above to assign a song to
this step.
After assigning a song to step 06, the *End*
message automatically jumps to the first field
on the next page (step 07).
To assign a song to the first step, which is
already selected:
(9) Continue assigning songs to new steps until
your chain is complete.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
(10)After compiling your chain, press the [Save]
(12)Press the [EXECUTE] field to save your chain to
SmartMedia card.
field.
The display now shows a confirmation message
and then returns to the Song Chain page.
(11)Enter a name (up to 12 characters).
See p. 29 for how to enter names.
Editing Chains
If, while programming or using a chain, you notice that one song is missing from your play list, or if you decide
not to use a given song after all, you need to edit your Song Chain. Steps (1)~(3) below are only necessary if you
want to edit a different chain than the one you have just programmed.
(1) Press the [CHAIN] button until the Song Chain
GDeleting steps
page appears.
On the Song Chain Edit page (see left), select
the step you wish to delete and press the
[Remove] field.
(2) Press the field of the chain you wish to edit.
Depending on the number of chains already
present on your SmartMedia card, you may
have to use the [ø] [˚] fields for changing pages.
All subsequent steps now move up one entry.
Example: if you delete step 04 of a chain that
contains 10 steps, step 05 becomes 04, step 06
becomes 05, etc.
(5) Press the [Save] field to save your edited
chain.
(3) Press the [Edit] field.
(4) Proceed as follows for editing your chain:
GInserting Chain steps
To add a step and assign a song to it, select the
step that should follow your new step, then
press the [Insert] field. (Example: to insert a step
before step 04, press the [04] field.)
Note: By pressing the [Back≈to≈Edit] field or the [EXIT]
button, you not only leave this page, but you also delete
any changes you have made up to that point.
GClear ALL Steps
This takes you to the following display page:
The Song Chain Edit page has a
[Clear≈ALL≈Steps] field you can use to remove
all steps of the currently selected Chain. In
effect, this means that only the name is pre-
served, while the Chain can/must be pro-
grammed again.
See steps (5) and (6) above for how to assign a
song to the newly inserted step.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More refined song functions
Using Song Chains
Here’s how songs chains can be used for your performances:
(1) Insert the SmartMedia™ card that contains
the chain (and songs) you need into the slot.
(2) Press the [CHAIN] button.
At the end of the first song step, the next song
is selected automatically, if the [NEXT≈SONG]
button lights. (If you stop playback halfway into
the song, then start it again, the next step is
played back.)
If the [NEXT≈SONG] button does not light, play-
back stops at the end of the current step, the
next step is loaded, but playback needs to be
started using the [®÷ª] button. (If you stop play-
back halfway into the song, then start it again,
playback continues from the place where you
stopped it.)
You can release it as soon as the display looks
more or less as follows:
The two fields that appear on the main page
during chain playback allow you to navigate
your chain. While the [CHAIN] button lights,
there are indeed two more fields:
(3) Press the field that corresponds to the chain
you want to use.
Use the [ø] [˚] fields to move to the previous or
next page of song chains (if available and nec-
essary).
Use the [|√√] field to select the previous step,
and [®®|] to select the next step. If you do so
while playback is running, the previous or next
song will be played back as soon as the current
song is finished.
(4) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
Note: The MARK JUMP buttons are also available dur-
ing Song Chain playback, so feel free to use them (see
p. 17).
(6) Press [®÷ª] again to continue with the next
The [CHAIN] button now lights to indicate that
the Song Chain function is active.
step.
(7) To switch off the Song Chain function, press
the [CHAIN] button and the [EXIT≈CHAIN] field
(upper left; the [CHAIN] button goes dark).
Selecting another (single) song via the Song
Finder will also deactivate the Chain function.
(5) Press the [®÷ª] button to start playback of
your chain.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Managing Song Chains
Song Chains can be renamed and deleted.
(1) Insert the SmartMedia™ card that contains
the chain you wish to rename or delete into
the slot.
GDeleting a chain from SmartMedia card
See steps (1)~(3) above, then press the [Delete]
field. As this may ruin your work, you need to
confirm this command:
(2) Press the [CHAIN] button.
The display looks more or less as follows:
You have three options here. Be aware that a
deleted chain cannot be recalled.
(3) Press the field that corresponds to the chain
you need.
[YES] deletes the chain file (but not the Stan-
Use the [ø] [˚] fields to move to the previous or
next page of song chains (if available and nec-
essary).
dard MIDI Files it refers to).
[NO] leaves the chain intact and takes you back
to the main page.
[CANCEL] leaves the chain intact and takes you
back to the Song Chain page, where you could
select another chain to be deleted.
GRenaming a chain
To change the name of the selected chain, press
the [Rename] field.
Note: Even if you delete the selected chain, this “only”
disposes of the play list. The Standard MIDI Files
assigned to the chain are not deleted and can thus be
used in isolation, or assigned to new/other chains.
Enter the desired characters (page 29) and
press the [Execute] field. After a brief confirma-
tion, the display returns to the Song Chain
page.
Note: You do not need to save a chain after renaming
it: this change applies to the file on SmartMedia card.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with User Programs
9. Working with User Programs
The DisCover 5 is equipped with 128 User Program memories that allow you to store almost all settings (or regis-
trations) you make on the front panel and the various display pages. Additional registrations can be loaded directly
from SmartMedia card and used right away.
Before taking a closer look at these User Programs,
there is one thing we have to point out: all settings
related to MIDI must be written to a MIDI Set
(page 103).
MIDI settings are not saved to a User Program. The
reason for this is simple: You probably need a lot
more memories for your songs than you do for your
MIDI gear. Writing the MIDI settings to a User Pro-
gram would slow down the loading process.
Note: It is perfectly possible to link a MIDI Set to a User Pro-
gram, so that the User Program in question also recalls the
linked MIDI Set (page 85).
Writing your settings to a User Program
It is a good idea to memorize your settings frequently even if you still need to do some touching up afterwards.
Those intermediary saves allow you to return to the
previous stage whenever you do not like your last
modifications. Try to use the User Programs as
“recall buffers” to be able to return to the previously
edited settings, discarding only the latest modifica-
tions.
The display changes to:
Save your settings after...
• …editing the Vocal Harmonizer parameters;
• …selecting Tones for the Keyboard parts;
• …editing the Mixer settings (including the
effects);
• …defining the D Beam and Footswitch func-
tions.
(2) Press the [MEMORIZE] field.
That way, subsequent modifications can be
undone by loading the “provisional” User Pro-
gram settings you do not want to lose.
(1) Press the [USER≈PROGRAM] field on the main
page.
The field (“Cancel”) next to the [A] and [B] fields
refers to the name of the last settings you
loaded.
(3) Use the [A]/[B] and the numeric fields to select
the Group, the bank and the memory number
where you wish to write your settings.
(4) Enter a name for your new User Program.
See page 29. You only have to do this the first
time you write (or “memorize”) new settings to
a User Program. You can also name your User
Program at a later stage and then write it again
under the same address.
Alternative: press the [USER≈PROGRAM] but-
ton.
This name is very important for taking advan-
tage of the User Program Finder function
(page 82).
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Use a name that somehow summarizes the
memory’s contents. The name of the song you
will use these settings for is probably the most
explicit name you can think of.
Program for the first part of a song, another
one for the bridge, and a third one for the clos-
ing section. Doing so allows you to “play” with
the effect settings of the Keyboard parts, for
example.
It is perfectly possible to program several User
Programs for one song. Selecting a User Pro-
gram is a lot faster than calling up one of the
DisCover 5’s functions, modifying the settings,
etc., while playing. You could program one User
(5) Press the [EXECUTE] field.
The display confirms that the settings have
been written to the selected memory and
returns to the page of step (1) above.
Selecting User Programs
Cancel
For song playback, or whenever you want to start anew, you should select the “Cancel” User Program. This allows
you to leave the User Program mode (i.e. no longer work with the settings of the last User Program you may
have loaded).
Note: The “Cancel” memory is read-only. You cannot
write data to it.
Note: Unless you specified a User Program for the Star-
tup function (page 85), you can also load the original
Cancel settings by powering off your DisCover 5 and
turning it back on again.
These settings can be recalled any time, i.e. even
after selecting a “regular” User Program.
Simultaneously press User Program [DOWN] and
[UP].
Using the numeric buttons and/or the display
Selecting User Programs works exactly like selecting Tones: you can work with the TONE/USER PROGRAM sec-
tion (after pressing [USER≈PROGRAM]), via the display, or both.
The display tracks your actions on the TONE/USER
PROGRAM pad, so that you could start by pressing
one of those buttons, and finish off via the display.
The display changes to:
(1) Press the [USER≈PROGRAM] field on the main
page.
Alternatively, press the [USER≈PROGRAM] but-
ton.
There are two Groups with 8 banks each.
(2) Press the [GROUP] button once or twice (so
that the “A” or “B” indicator lights).
You can also press the [A] or [B] field in the dis-
play.
(3) Press a TONE/USER PROGRAM [1]~[8] button
to select a bank within this Group.
You can also press a [1]~[8] field in the display.
(4) Press the field of the User Program you need.
If you selected “Tone/User Program Select
Mode” [1] (page 35), you can also press a TONE/
USER PROGRAM [1]~[8] button to select a
memory within this bank.
In that case, you can select the group (A or B)
and the bank (1~8) a little ahead of the song
part where you want the new settings to take
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with User Programs
effect. Only when you specify the User Program
number will the corresponding settings be
loaded.
the fact that the current settings no longer cor-
respond to the ones you recalled. If you like
them better than the original settings, you
must write them again. See page 80.
Sometimes, an asterisk (*) is displayed. This
happens when you change a parameter setting
after recalling a User Program to alert you to
Selecting User Programs with [DOWN] [UP]
The following method is especially useful if you programmed two or more User Programs for a song or if the
User Program sequence corresponds exactly to the song sequence you are about to play (i.e. settings of the first
song or song part in memory A11, settings of the second song or song part in A12, etc.).
Pressing [DOWN] or [UP] immediately selects the
preceding or following User Program.
[DOWN] Selects the preceding User Program
(for example A11 if you selected A12 before
pressing this button).
Note: If you press [UP] after selecting A88, your
DisCover 5 will call up B11. Likewise, if you press
[DOWN] after selecting B11, your DisCover 5 will call up
A88, and so on.
Note: User Programs can also be selected using an
optional footswitch connected to the FOOT SWITCH
socket on the rear panel. See “User Program Up” (p. 43).
[UP] Selects the following User Program (for
example A13, if you selected A12 before press-
ing this button).
Finder: selecting User Programs on SmartMedia card
Your DisCover 5 also allows you to directly load any User Program from SmartMedia card, which is just as fast as
working with internal User Programs. The supplied card already contains 128 such User Programs.
The User Program Finder function is also available
for your own User Programs, but only after you
saved them to SmartMedia card. See page 106. By
doing that, you actually save a User Program “set”
that contains the settings of all 128 internal User
Program memories. You cannot save individual User
Programs to SmartMedia card (or floppy disk). But
you can load just one User Program from such a set
– provided that set resides on SmartMedia card.
(2) Insert the SmartMedia card with the settings
you need into the slot.
Note: This function is not available for floppy disks. You
may thus have to copy your User Program sets from
floppy to your SmartMedia card. See page 109 for
details.
Note: The DisCover 5 does not support User Programs
of the Roland VA, E, KR, or EM series.
(3) Press the [User≈Program≈Finder] field.
Such a User Program then resides in the “Cancel”
memory (a buffer) and will be overwritten as soon
as you select another internal or external User Pro-
gram. You could, however, decide to write it to an
internal memory. This function can also be used for
creating “best of” compilations from various User
Program sets.
(1) Press the [USER≈PROGRAM] field on the main
page, or the [USER≈PROGRAM] button in the
TONE/USER PROGRAM section.
The display changes to:
(4) If available, press the field of the User Pro-
gram you need.
If the name is not displayed, use [ø] or [˚] to go
to a different page, then press the field of the
settings you are interested in.
This page lists the names of all individual User
Programs contained in the various sets on the
inserted SmartMedia card.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
To quickly locate the desired User Program…
(5) Press the [Finder] field.
• If you forgot to insert a character, use [ø] or [˚]
to select the position where the missing char-
acter should be inserted. Then press [Insert], fol-
lowed by the character you wish to insert.
(7) Decide how the Finder should look for the
files:
• Press the [Alphabetic≈Order] field to search for
all entries that start with the characters you
entered (“BEA”, for example). Names that match
the specified criteria will be displayed at the top
of the list.
• Press the [Find≈Only] field to have the
DisCover 5 search for names that contain the
supplied information. (This would allow you to
also locate a file called “Raggabeat” if you
entered “BEA”.)
(6) Enter only as many characters as you think
are necessary to find the User Program you
are after.
The character string you enter can be used in
two ways (see below).
If the following message appears, the
DisCover 5 was unable to locate User Programs
that match the search criteria:
• Use the [ø] and [˚] fields to select the position
for which you wish to enter a new character.
• Use the alphanumeric keypad in the right cor-
ner to enter the desired characters. This keypad
works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone:
you may have to press an alphanumeric field
several times to select the desired character or
number.
Note: There’s is no [A/a] field here, because the Finder
makes no distinction between upper- and lower-case
letters.
(8) Press the field of the User Program you need
and start playing.
• The [Delete] field allows you to delete the
inverted character.
• Press [Space] to insert a blank (or the number
“0”).
If you want all files to be displayed again, press
the [List≈ALL] field.
Selectively loading User Program settings (User Program Hold)
Your DisCover 5 can keep certain settings of the previous User Program while selecting another User Program.
That way, you can go on playing with the last Tones you selected and/or Harmonizer settings you made.
(1) Press the [USER≈PROGRAM] button or the
Press [HARMONIZER] to ignore the various
VOICE-FX, AUTO TUNE, etc. settings you have
made. See “Editing the Vocal Harmonizer parts”
(p. 61).
Note: You can also switch on (or off) both buttons, if
you like.
field of the same name in the display.
(2) If you need a different User Program (whose
settings should be used), select it, otherwise…
(3) Press the USER PROGRAM HOLD [TONE] or
[HARMONIZER] button, depending on which
settings you do not want to recall.
Pressing one of these buttons without selecting
a User Program afterwards has no effect. Only
when you select another User Program will the
selected filter (because that is what the User
Program Hold buttons are) start working.
To once again load all settings of the new User
Program, switch off the USER PROGRAM HOLD
button that lights.
Press [TONE] to ignore Tone selection for the
Keyboard parts when a different User Program
is recalled.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Working with User Programs
Automatic functions for User Programs
Song Link
This function means that, by recalling a User Pro-
gram, you also prepare the song in question. Such
songs reside on SmartMedia card, which means that
it must be inserted, otherwise, this system won’t
work. All you need to do then, is hit the [®÷ª] button
to start playback of that song.
(4) Press the [Song≈List] field to jump to the dis-
play page where you can select a song.
Your DisCover 5 only memorizes the song name. If,
at the time you recall such a User Program, that
song is not available, the display will respond with:
See “Locating files with the Song Finder” (p. 71).
Bear in mind that the song data are not loaded
into the User Program memory. You will have to
insert the SmartMedia in question into the slot
before recalling this User Program (otherwise,
an error message is displayed and the song is
not loaded).
Remove the SmartMedia card, and insert the proper
card and select that User Program again. If you
don’t, the DisCover 5 will start playback of the pre-
viously loaded song when you press [®÷ª] again.
If you are planning to save your User Programs
to SmartMedia card and to use the User Pro-
gram Finder function, the song must either
already reside on the correct SmartMedia card,
or you must copy it to that card at later stage.
Links of User Programs selected via the Finder
function will not work if the song is on one
SmartMedia card, while the User Program is on
another.
(1) Press the [USER≈PROGRAM] field on the main
page, or the [USER≈PROGRAM] button in the
TONE/USER PROGRAM field.
The display changes to:
(5) Press the [Link] field to establish the link to
the song whose name appears on a white
background.
This takes you back to the “Song & MIDI Link”
page. The name of the song appears in the
“Song Name” field with a paper clip icon to its
left.
(6) Press the [Delete≈Song≈Link] field to break the
link if you no longer need it.
(7) Continue with the section below (MIDI Set
(2) On the display page that appears now, press
the [Song≈&≈MIDI≈Link] field.
The display changes to:
Link), or press [Back≈to≈User≈Prg] to return to
the page where you came from.
Note: Do not forget to write your User Program after
changing these settings (page 80).
(3) Insert the SmartMedia card with the song
you need into the slot.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Linking a MIDI Set to a User Program
MIDI Sets are “User Programs for MIDI parameters”. There are eight such memories (page 103).
If you regularly use the DisCover 5 in different MIDI
environments (studio, live, band), preparing three
MIDI Sets and linking them to the User Programs
you usually use in the studio, on stage, etc., can be a
time saver. In other situations, such a link could be
dangerous, because it would reconfigure the
DisCover 5’s MIDI parameters without you actually
knowing it.
The display changes to:
(1) Press the [USER≈PROGRAM] field on the main
page, or the [USER≈PROGRAM] button in the
TONE/USER PROGRAM field.
If you are still on the “Song & MIDI Link” page,
skip to step (3) below.
(3) Press a MIDI Set [1]~[8] field to select the
desired MIDI Set.
(2) On the display page that appears now, press
To break the link to this MIDI Set, press its field
again (all indicator icons must be dark).
the [Song≈&≈MIDI≈Link] field.
Note: Do not forget to write your User Program after
changing these settings (page 80).
(4) Press [Back≈to≈User≈Prg] to return to the User
Program selection page, or the [EXIT] button
to return to the main page.
Startup User Program
Whenever you switch on the DisCover 5, it automatically selects the “Cancel” User Program (page 81). But
maybe you prefer to be operational right away. In that case, tell the DisCover 5 which User Program it should
recall whenever you switch it on:
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(2) Press the [UTILITY] field. If the [Startup] field in
the left corner is not displayed in white, press
it.
The display changes to:
(3) Press the [Startup≈User≈Program] field so that it
is displayed in white.
(4) Use the [VALUE] dial to select the User Pro-
gram to be recalled.
If you don’t want any User Program to be
recalled, select “Off”.
Note: You can only select internal User Programs (A11~
B88) here.
(5) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Makeup Tools
10. Song Makeup Tools
You already know how the Cover function works (page 19). It relies on presets for the following, more detailed,
parameters with which you can customize playback of the currently selected song. Changes you perform here must
be saved to disk or SmartMedia card if you want them to be permanent.
Before you begin…
(1) Insert the SmartMedia card (or floppy disk)
with the desired song into the slot (or drive),
select the song, and press the [®÷ª] button.
This will load the first chunk of song data into
the DisCover 5’s buffer. Only then will you be
able to edit the following settings.
(2) Press the [®÷ª] button again after a few mea-
sures.
Though you can also edit the following settings
while playback is running, selecting Tones/Drum
Sets may become a bit confusing.
Instrument: selecting different sounds
If you do not agree with the instrumentation of a Standard MIDI File, use the INSTRUMENT parameters allow to
select different sounds:
(1) Press the [INSTRUMENT] button.
(2) If the track you are interested in (9~16) is not
listed, press the [Trk9~16] field.
This page lists some sounds that are used by
tracks 1~8. “Tracks” are in fact MIDI channels,
and usually used to differentiate between the
various parts of a song (drums, bass, guitar line,
piano part, etc.).
Note: The MUTE messages within a Tone/Drum Set field
mean that the passage in question (using that Tone/
Drum Set) is not played. This needs to be set on one of
the other SONG MAKEUP TOOLS pages (see below).
The [ø] [˚] fields that may (but do not necessar-
ily) appear allow you to jump to other instances
where a Tone/Drum Set change occurs.
Standard MIDI Files can contain data for up to
16 tracks (MIDI channels). Quite a few Standard
MIDI Files use fewer tracks, but the following
are almost always present (that is part of the
“standard”):
Note that the Tone/Drum Set field graphics are
displayed in chronological order within a track,
but not in time. The “St. Slow Str.” change (track
3) may therefore be located way behind the
“Flugel Horn” (track 7) change, for example (see
the illustration of step (1)).
2 Bass line (uses a “Tone”)
4 Melody (uses a “Tone”)
10 Drums (uses a “Drum Set”)
(3) To switch a track on or off, press its [ON÷OFF]
field.
(4) To select a different Tone (tracks 1~9, 11~16)
or Drum Set (track 10):
• Press the field of the Tone/Drum Set you wish
to replace. (In the example of step (1), the “St.
AcPiano 1” sound can be changed.)
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
• Use the TONE/USER PROGRAM buttons and the
display to select a different sound, or press the
[Tone≈Finder] field and use the Tone Finder
Press the [Jump≈to≈1st≈note] field to jump to the
location where the Tone you are about to
change is used. Playback starts automatically
from that point. You can select another Tone (or
Drum Set) while the song is playing. To return
to that position, press [Jump≈to≈1st≈note] again.
function (page 33).
Note: If you work via the TONE/USER PROGRAM pad on
the front panel (and forget to look at the display), be
sure to also read the part about the [SAVE] field in the
next or subsequent sections. To keep your changes, you
must indeed save them to SmartMedia card or disk.
If you can barely hear the Tone/Drum Set, press
the [SOLO] field (indicator icon must be dis-
played in white), then use [Jump≈to≈1st≈note] to
jump to the first note of that instrument. Then
press [SOLO] again to switch this function off.
®
Tone Finder for song parts
After pressing the [Tone≈Finder] field, the display
looks as follows:
If you are happy with your new song instru-
mentation and wish to preserve it, press the
[SAVE] field. The display changes to:
The main routine of selecting Tones or Drum
Sets is identical to what you learned on
page 33: first select a family, and then specify a
Tone (or Drum Set) within that family.
See step (7) and following on page 69 for how
to save your song.
Note: If you also want to change the volume and other
song settings (see below), there is no need to save the
song just yet. The other SONG MAKEUP TOOLS pages
also provide [SAVE] fields.
Let’s have a look at the new elements on this
page.
Volume: part balance
From this point onward, there are no more tracks, just instruments. Here, you work on a Tone/Drum Set level (some
tracks may indeed use two or more sounds): if you think “the bass” is too loud, touch the corresponding field, and
turn it down… It doesn’t get any easier than that.
(1) Press the [VOLUME] button.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
Note: If the name of the desired Tone/Drum Set is not
currently displayed, use the [ø] [˚] fields in the lower
right corner to change pages.
(3) Use the [VALUE] dial to set the volume.
The volume settings of all instruments are dis-
played by means of a value.
The display changes to:
(4) Use the following fields to check your set-
tings:
Press the [Jump≈to≈1st≈note] field to jump to the
first note of that instrument. Playback starts
automatically from that point. You can also
change the volume while the song is playing. To
return to that position, press [Jump≈to≈1st≈note]
again.
If you can barely hear the instrument, press the
[SOLO] field (indicator icon must be displayed in
white), then use [Jump≈to≈1st≈note]. To listen to
all instruments again, press [SOLO] again to
switch this function off.
(2) Press the field that corresponds to the Tone/
Drum Set whose volume you wish to change
(or use the [PREV] [NEXT] buttons to select it).
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Makeup Tools
(5) Use the [MUTE] fields to switch off instru-
ments you do not want to hear, and switch
on those you do want to hear.
(6) If you are happy with your changes and wish
to preserve them, press the [SAVE] field. The
display changes to:
Please bear in mind that these [MUTE] fields
apply to the instruments (Tones/Drum Set) –
not to the entire track they belong to.
If the [MUTE] indicator “lights” (
), that
sound is indicated as
page.
on the INSTRUMENT
Note: Most tracks only use one Tone/Drum Set, so that
activating [MUTE] means that the track in question
never sounds.
See step (7) and following on page 69 for how
to save your song.
Note: If you also want to change other song settings,
there is no need to save the song just yet. The other
SONG MAKEUP TOOLS pages also provide [SAVE] but-
tons.
Reverb and Chorus: effect balance
On the following two pages, you can specify how strongly the instruments should be processed by the Reverb and/
or Chorus effects. The effects parameters (kind of Reverb and Chorus, etc.) can be set on the Common page (see
p. 94).
(1) Press the [REVERB] or [CHORUS] button.
(2) Press the field that corresponds to the instru-
ment (Tone/Drum Set) whose send level you
wish to change (or use the [PREV] [NEXT] but-
tons to select it).
The “send level” refers to the amount of the sig-
nal transmitted to the Reverb or Chorus effect
– and hence to the strength (intensity) with
which the instrument is processed.
Note: If the name of the instrument (Tone/Drum Set)
name is not currently displayed, use the [ø] [˚] fields in
the lower right corner to change pages.
The display changes to:
(3) Use the [VALUE] dial to set the send level.
The send level settings of all instruments are
displayed by means of a value.
(4) Use the following fields to check your set-
tings:
Press the [Jump≈to≈1st≈note] field to jump to the
first note of that instrument. Playback starts
automatically. You can also change the setting
while the song is playing. To return to that posi-
tion, press [Jump≈to≈1st≈note] again.
…or:
If you can barely hear the instrument, press the
[SOLO] field (indicator icon must be displayed in
white), then use [Jump≈to≈1st≈note]. To return to
all instruments, press [SOLO] again to switch
this function off.
(5) Use the [MUTE] fields to switch off instru-
ments you do not want to hear, and switch
on those you do want to hear.
Please bear in mind that these [MUTE] fields
apply to the instruments indicated by the Tone/
Drum Set names – not to the entire track they
belong to.
Press the field that corresponds to the effect for
which you wish to set the send level.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
If the [MUTE] indicator “lights” (
), that pas-
If you selected the drive that contains the orig-
inal version, the following message is displayed:
sage is indicated as
page.
on the INSTRUMENT
Note: Most tracks only use one Tone/Drum Set, so that
activating [MUTE] means that the track in question
never sounds.
(6) If you are happy with your changes and wish
to preserve them, press the [SAVE] field. The
display changes to:
If you pressed the [FLOPPY] field, the message
reads “SAME NAME ON DISK”.
• Press the [REPLACE] field to overwrite the old
version.
Press the [EXIT] button on the DisCover 5’s front
panel if you do not want to overwrite this song
and return to the previous page. Then enter a
different name (or select a different media).
(7) If necessary, change the song’s name.
You only need to do this if you want to preserve
the original version. The edits you have just per-
formed can only be read by the DisCover 5, and
so are of little use to other sequencers or SMF
players: they simply ignore it. So you might as
well save the song under its original name.
Besides, you can also save the song to a differ-
ent card or disk.
If the song doesn’t yet exist on the selected
SmartMedia card or floppy disk, the data are
saved, and the following message appears:
See page 29 for how to enter a different name.
(8) Press the [SMART≈MEDIA] or [FLOPPY] field to
select the Save destination.
Note: If you also want to change other song settings,
there is no need to save the song just yet. The other
SONG MAKEUP TOOLS pages also provide [SAVE] but-
tons.
(9) Press the [EXECUTE] field.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Makeup Tools
Palette: in-depth song editing
Now we are closing in on the “inner workings” of the instruments, with an overview of parameters also present on
the VOLUME, REVERB, and CHORUS pages, while new parameters are added. For even more control, you can actu-
ally really “edit” the selected Tones or Drum Set, specify how the Reverb and Chorus effects should sound, and
more…
As the Palette environment is a little bit more complex, let’s start with a general overview:
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
(1) Press the [PALETTE] button.
(5) Press [UNDO≈Changes] to reset the parameter
of the currently selected field to its saved set-
ting.
Example: If you change the Reverb parameter
(set to “40” within the Standard MIDI File) to
“94”, pressing [UNDO≈Changes] recalls the value
“40”.
The display changes to:
Note: The “saved setting” referred to above can mean
two things: the original value contained in the Standard
MIDI File (if you haven’t yet used the [SAVE] field), or the
last setting you saved yourself (via the [SAVE] field).
Parameters:
[PanPot] Use this parameter to set the stereo
placement of the selected instrument. Negative
values shift the instrument towards the left, “0”
means “no change”. Positive values shift the
instrument towards the right.
Note: In the case of Drum Sets, this setting applies to
all drum/percussion instruments. There is also a param-
eter that can be set for certain drum instruments. See
page 93.
All modifications on this page and the related
pages are SysEx data that alter the actual song
data (without replacing them). Only the
DisCover 5 can read these data. To other SMF
players, the song will still be the original song,
i.e. they will ignore these newly added SysEx
data.
[Octave] (Only for Tones) Use this parameter to
transpose the selected instrument up or down
by up to 4 octaves if you think it is too high or
too low.
[Velocity] This parameter allows you to modify
the velocity range of the instrument in ques-
tion. “0” means that the recorded values are left
untouched, negative values reduce all velocity
values by the same amount (leaving differences
between notes intact), while positive settings
shift all velocity values in a positive direction.
Most fields ([MUTE], [Volume], [Reverb],
[Chorus], [Jump≈to≈1st≈Note], [SOLO], [SAVE])
should look familiar. See the previous pages
for details.
Here’s what’s new on this page.
(2) Use the [ø] [˚] fields in the lower right corner
to select the instrument you wish to edit.
Each page indeed only displays the name of one
Tone/Drum Set. If you select a Drum Set, the
display changes to:
[Drum≈Instrument] (Only for Drums Sets) Calls
up the display page of the same name. This is a
field you need to press (it cannot be activated
or selected with the [PREV] [NEXT] buttons). See
page 93 for details.
Note: All fields in the DisCover 5’s display labelled “Go
To”, “Do It”, and “Back to…” need to be pressed.
[Drum≈Instrument] is part of those fields.
Note: See page 94 for details about the [Common] field.
The [Octave] field is replaced by a
[Drum≈Instrument] field. See below for details.
(3) Press the big Tone/Drum Set field and use the
TONE/USER PROGRAM buttons or the
[Tone≈Finder] facility to select another Tone or
Drum Set.
You can also use the [PREV] [NEXT] buttons to
select this field.
(4) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Makeup Tools
I Release: This parameter adjusts the time over
which the sound will decay after the note is released
until it is no longer heard. The cutoff frequency also
falls according to this setting.
®
[Sound≈Edit] for Tones
If the uppermost field to the right of the Tone/
Drum Set field reads [Tone≈Finder], you have
selected a Tone page.
Use the following three parameters if you think the
part in question has too much (or could use a little
more) vibrato.
Note: Some “V” Tones contain natural (sampled) vibrato
whose depth or speed cannot be changed.
I Vibrato Rate: This parameter adjusts the speed of
the pitch modulation. Positive (+) settings make the
preset pitch modulation faster, and negative (–) set-
tings make it slower.
I Vibrato Depth: Sets the intensity of the pitch
modulation. Positive (+) settings mean that the
“wobble” becomes more prominent, while negative
(–) settings make it shallower.
In that case, pressing the [Sound≈Edit] field takes
you to the following page where you can make
more refined changes to the selected Tone:
I Vibrato Delay: This parameter adjusts the time
required for the vibrato effect to begin. Positive (+)
settings increase the delay, and negative settings
shorten it.
(2) Press the [Back≈to≈Palette] field to return to
the Palette page.
If necessary, press the [SAVE] field to save your
settings.
(1) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
®
[Sound≈Edit] for Drum Sets
If the uppermost field to the right of the Tone/
Drum Set field reads [Drum≈Set≈Finder], you
have selected a Drum Set page.
I Cutoff: This filter parameter allows you to make
the selected sound darker or brighter. Positive Cutoff
settings mean that more overtones are allowed to
pass, so that the sound becomes brighter. On page 59
you will find a graphic.
In that case, pressing the [Sound≈Edit] field takes
you to the following page where you can edit
the Drum Set as a whole.
Note: For some sounds, positive (+) Cutoff settings may
cause no noticeable change, because the pre-pro-
grammed Cutoff parameter is already set to its maxi-
mum value.
I Resonance: This is a parameter one invariably
associates with a synthesizer. When the Resonance
value is increased, the overtones in the area of the
cutoff frequency will be emphasized, creating a
sound with a strong character.
Note: For some sounds, negative (–) Resonance settings
may produce no noticeable change because the Reso-
nance is already set to the minimum value.
(1) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
The following parameters allow you to set the Tone’s
“envelope”. See page 60 for details.
I Attack: This parameter adjusts the onset of the
sound. Negative values speed up the attack, so that
the sound becomes more aggressive.
I Decay: This parameter adjusts the time over
which the sound will fall from the highest point of
the attack down to the sustain level.
Note: Percussive sounds usually have a Sustain level of
“0”. Piano and guitar sounds are in this category. Hold-
ing the notes for a long time will thus have little effect
on their duration.
I Cutoff: Allows you to make the Drum Set (all
instruments) brighter (positive values) or darker
(negative values). The further this value is set in the
negative direction, the fewer overtones will be
allowed to pass, and the sound will become softer
(darker).
I Resonance: This parameter allows you to add a
“synthetic” character to your Drum Sets (choose a
positive value), or to make it sound more natural.
(2) Use the [Drum≈MUTE] field to suppress (or
add) the drum sounds.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
(3) Use the [Percussion≈MUTE] field to suppress (or
• Press the [Instrum] field, and use the [ø] [˚] and
add) the percussion sounds.
big fields to make your selection.
(4) Press the [Back≈to≈Palette] field to return to
the Palette page.
If necessary, press the [SAVE] field to save your
settings.
®
If you press [Drum≈Instrument] on the Palette
page
If the uppermost field to the right of the Tone/
Drum Set field reads [Drum≈Set≈Finder], you
have selected a Drum Set page.
In that case, pressing the [Drum≈Instrument]
field takes you to the following page where you
can make more refined changes for certain
instruments of the selected Drum Set:
Note: Please be aware that you can only select sounds
from the currently active Drum Set.
• Press [Back≈to≈DrumInst] to return to the Drum
Instrument page.
(4) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the remaining parameters, and set the desired
values with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
I Volume: Use this parameter to set the volume of
the selected drum instrument.
I PanPot: Use this parameter to set the stereo
placement of the selected drum instrument. “0”
means “no change”, negative values shift the instru-
ment towards the left, and positive values shift it
towards the right.
I Pitch: Use this parameter to tune the selected
drum instrument higher or lower. The main reason
for doing so would be to create a “special effect” or
to make a snare sound, etc., slightly snappier. “0”
means that the pitch is left unchanged.
The eligible instruments and corresponding
note numbers are:
C#2/37 Side Stick
E2/40 Snare 2
D2/38 Snare 1,
F2/41 Low Tom 2,
E3/52 Chinese Cymbal G#3/56 Cowbell,
A3/57 Crash Cymbal 2 F4/65 High Timbale.
I Reverb & Chorus: Use these parameters to set the
Reverb or Chorus send level. The effects themselves
can be edited via the Common page (see below).
I Velocity: This parameter allows you to modify the
velocity range of the drum instrument in question.
“0” means that the recorded values are left
untouched, a negative setting reduces all velocity
values by the same amount (leaving variations
intact), while a positive setting shifts all velocity
values in a positive direction.
Note: The names of the drum/percussion sounds
depend on the currently selected Drum Set. The sounds
are usually similar in nature, however.
(1) Use the [ø] [˚] fields to select the drum instru-
ment you want to edit.
(2) Press the [MUTE] field to switch the instru-
ment in question on/off.
(3) To select a different sound:
• Press the [Drum≈Instr≈Finder] field.
(5) Press the [Back≈to≈Palette] field to return to
the Palette page.
If necessary, press the [SAVE] field to save your
settings.
• Press [Family] and select an instrument family
(snare drums, cymbals, etc.).
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Song Makeup Tools
You can also select User Prg, in which case the
display changes as follows:
®
If you press [Common] on the Palette page
After pressing the [Common] field on the Pal-
ette page, the display looks as follows. The
parameters on this page apply to the entire
song – and do therefore not depend on
whether you selected a Tone or Drum Set.
Selecting “User Prg” means that you want the
song to use the effect settings contained in the
last User Program you recalled (page 81), in
which case, there is obviously no need to
change the level setting.
(1) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
[Chr≈Type] Chorus broadens the spatial image of
the sound and creates a stereo impression. You
can choose from 8 types of Chorus.
Chorus
1~4
These are conventional Chorus effects
that add spaciousness and depth to the
sound.
[Rev≈Type] This parameter allows you to specify
what kind of Reverb effect you need. The avail-
able Reverb types are:
Fb Chorus This type produces a Flanger-like effect
and has a soft sound.
Room1, These types simulate the Reverb charac-
Room2, teristics of a room. The higher the num-
Flanger
This is an effect that sounds somewhat
like a jet airplane taking off and landing.
Room3
ber (1, 2, or 3), the “bigger” the room
becomes.
Delay
This is a Delay (echo effect) with a short
Delay time.
Hall1,
Hall2
These types simulate the Reverb of a
small (1) or large (2) concert hall and
thus sound much “bigger” than the
Room types above.
Pan Delay This is a short Delay with many repeats
that alternate between the left and
right channels.
Plate
Digital simulation of a metal plate that
is sometimes used for creating Reverb
effects. Works well for percussive
sounds.
Note: Selecting one of the above also means that the
Keyboard parts will use this new effect type (see p. 50).
Original means that the song uses its own
(programmed) Chorus settings.
Delay
A Delay effect (no Reverb). Works a lot
like an echo effect and thus repeats the
sounds.
You can also select User Prg, in which case the
display changes, because you chose to work
with the Chorus settings currently in effect for
the last User Program you selected.
Pan Delay This is a stereo version of the above
Delay effect. It creates repetitions that
alternate between the left and right
channels.
[Transpose] This parameter allows you to trans-
pose all song parts (except the drums) up to 12
semitones (1 octave) up or down. This value will
be written to the song data and used every time
you play back this song. Working with the
SINGER KEY facility (page 28) or the TRANS-
POSER buttons (page 38) yields a similar result,
so choose whichever is more convenient.
Note: Selecting one of the above also means that the
Keyboard parts will use this new effect type (see p. 50).
The Original setting means that the song uses
its own (programmed) Reverb settings.
[Rev≈Level]& [Chr≈Level] These parameters are
not available if [Rev≈Type] (or [Chr≈Type]) is set
to “User Prg”.
When they are available, they allow you to
modify the output level of the Reverb (or Cho-
rus) processor.
[Tempo] Allows you to change the song’s tempo
(ꢀ = 20~250) if you do not agree with the preset
song tempo.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
(2) Press the [Back≈to≈Palette] field to return to
the Palette page.
If necessary, press the [SAVE] field to save your
settings. See page 89.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing Lyrics
11. Editing Lyrics
Your DisCover 5 contains functions that allow you to add Lyrics to a Standard MIDI File that does not contain them.
It is also possible to edit the Lyrics data of Standard MIDI Files that conform to the Tune 1000 format (other for-
mats cannot be edited on the DisCover 5).
This may come in handy when you keep forgetting the words of a song you wish to use for your performances and
want them to be included in the song file.
Note: The DisCover 5 only allows you to link (“synchronize”)
Lyrics data to the note messages of the loaded Standard MIDI
File. The text data proper must be entered on a Windows-
compatible PC (or a Mac and saved as .TXT data for Windows).
See right for the supported characters.
Adding Lyrics to a song
Here’s a step-by-step tour of how to add Lyrics data
to a Standard MIDI File:
This is only possible while song playback is
stopped. So be sure to stop playback before
pressing [Edit]. Otherwise a “CAN’T EXECUTE”
error message is displayed.
(1) Prepare the text file with the lyrics you wish
to associate with a given song.
Use a word processor program on your com-
puter, taking care to type a return after every
line or word you wish to synchronize separately.
The synchronization function (see below)
always works with entire lines of text (i.e. until
the following return). In any case, no line
should contain more than 28 characters.
Export the file as .TXT file and save it to a floppy.
(2) Load the song you wish to add Lyrics to.
See page 16.
(3) Press the [LYRICS&CHORD] button.
(5) Now, we’re going to import the text file you
created earlier:
(6) Insert the floppy disk that contains the text
file you wish to associate with the Standard
MIDI File in the DisCover 5’s RAM memory.
(7) Press the [TXT≈Import] field.
The display changes to:
(8) Press the field that contains the name of the
desired file.
If you don’t see the desired file name, use [ø] [˚]
to select another group of 14 files. (If you still
can’t find the desired file, it may not end in
“.TXT” or not be a text/ASCII file.)
If the song already contains Lyrics data that can
be edited, the first few lines are displayed.
(4) Press the [Edit] field.
(9) Press the [EXECUTE] field to load the desired
text file.
(10)Press [Back≈to≈Lyr≈Edit] to return to the Edit
Lyrics page (see above).
Now you’re all set for the synchronization work:
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
(11)Press the [Lyrics≈Synchro] field.
(15)On the beat where the first text line should
be displayed, press the [NEXT] button (front
panel).
This display page should contain the first line of
the text you imported. (This function can also
be used to correct the synchronization of Lyrics
data contained in a Tune 1000-format song you
loaded.)
(16)Repeat this at the quarter note where the
second line should be displayed.
Here’s what we’re going to do: every line of the
text we imported can be associated with a
given quarter note of the song. We’ll do this
while the song is playing back. Synchronizing
text lines is a matter of pressing the [NEXT] but-
ton on the beats where they should appear dur-
ing normal playback of the Standard MIDI File.
Each press of the [NEXT] button will associate
the text line below the arrows (® √) with the
quarter note where the button was pressed. The
preceding line automatically scrolls above the
(® √) section, while the following line will
appear below the arrows.
(17)Keep pressing [NEXT] on all beats where the
subsequent text lines should appear.
(18)Press the [®÷ª] button when all Lyrics data
have been synchronized.
(12)Press [|√] to return to the beginning of the
song or use [º] or [‰] to jump to a measure
that lies a little ahead of the place where the
first line should be displayed during normal
operation.
(19)If you made a mistake somewhere, you can
return to that measure using [º] and start
anew from that position.
In that case, you will have to keep synchroniz-
ing the remaining text until the end of the
song.
(13)Press [REC≈∏] (Lyrics Sync).
(20)Press the [Save] field and save your song with
the synchronized lyrics to disk or SmartMedia
card.
(14)Press the [®÷ª] button.
• Enter the name (page 29).
• Press the [SMART≈MEDIA] or [FLOPPY] field to
select the destination.
• Press the [EXECUTE] field.
Playback (and Lyric synchronization recording)
starts.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing Lyrics
‘Utility’ functions for Edit Lyrics
There are three functions you may want to use for managing Lyrics files, or songs with associated lyrics. All of them
can be accessed via the Lyrics Edit menu (see page 96 for how to get there.)
Exporting the Lyrics data as text file
Here’s what you need to do to export the Lyrics data
contained in a Standard MIDI File as text data. This
may be useful for editing or printing the lyrics using
your computer.
Save without Lyrics
This function allows you to save the song in the
DisCover 5’s RAM to disk without the Lyrics data.
(1) On the Lyrics Edit page, press the
[Save≈without≈Lyrics] field.
Note: This only works if the Standard MIDI File in the
DisCover 5’s RAM memory contains lyrics data.
(1) On the Lyrics Edit page, press the [TXT≈Export]
field.
(2) Press the [YES] field to erase all Lyrics data
still present in the DisCover 5’s RAM. This
takes you to the SAVE Song page where you
can save the MIDI data without lyrics.
Press [NO] to return to the Edit Lyrics page
without erasing the Lyrics.
(2) Name the text file.
This is only necessary if you do not agree with
the preset name (i.e. the one of the song in
question).
See page 29 for how to enter the desired name.
(3) Press the [EXECUTE] field to save the file to
disk.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
12. MIDI
MIDI is short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface. The word refers to many things, the most obvious
being a connector type that is used by musical instruments and other devices to exchange messages relating to the
act of making music.
Each time you play on the DisCover 5’s keyboard or
start song playback, your instrument transmits MIDI
data to its MIDI OUT socket. If you connect this
socket to the MIDI IN socket of another instrument,
that instrument may play the same notes as one of
the DisCover 5’s parts, select sounds, etc.
MIDI is a universal standard, which means that
musical data can be sent to and received by instru-
ments of different types and manufacturers. Fur-
thermore, MIDI allows you to connect your
DisCover 5 to a computer or hardware sequencer.
Connect your DisCover 5 as shown below.
Transmits “MIDI IN” data
The DisCover 5 receives data
External MIDI instrument/
computer (*)
External MIDI instrument
DisCover 5
The DisCover 5 transmits data
MIDI can simultaneously transmit and receive mes-
sages on 16 channels, so that up to 16 instruments
can be controlled. Nowadays, most instruments
–like your DisCover 5– are multitimbral, which
means that they can play several musical parts with
different sounds.
The transmit and receive channels of the Keyboard
parts are set as follows:
Upper
Lower
MIDI channel 4
MIDI channel 11
M.Drums MIDI channel 16
Note: All DisCover 5 parts are set to receive MIDI messages. If
they do not seem to respond to the messages you send from
the external controller, you should check the MIDI connec-
tions and the channel settings on the DisCover 5.
Note: The VOCAL HARMONIZER parts are not MIDI compati-
ble and can therefore neither transmit, nor receive MIDI data.
The how-to’s
Accessing the MIDI functions
Do the following to gain access to the MIDI func-
tions:
(2) Press the [MIDI] field.
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
The display changes to:
(3) Do one of the following:
• Press a [1]~[8] field to select a MIDI Set.
• Press one or several “Macro Settings” fields to
recall the corresponding presets (called “mac-
ros”).
• Press the [Edit] field to gain access to the MIDI
parameters.
(4) If you changed certain MIDI parameter set-
tings, press the [EXECUTE] field to write them
to a MIDI Set (page 103).
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI
(5) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
As soon as you press one of these fields, the
number of the currently selected MIDI Set is
indicated with an asterisk (*) to signal that the
current settings no longer correspond to the
written settings. See p. 103 for details about
the MIDI Sets.
page.
Editing procedure
After performing step (6) below, you will see a
display page that works as follows. In fact, it
uses the same system as the Vocal Harmonizer
(Menu) and the Disk Media environment.
Working with Macros
The opening “MIDI” page contains three big
fields with preset settings. All you need to do is
press them to restore the default settings for
the sections or aspects in question.
(6) Press the [Edit] field on the first “MIDI” page.
[Keyboard]: This field recalls the factory MIDI
settings for the Keyboard parts (Upper, Lower,
M.Drums). The most important (and practical)
use for this field is to set the MIDI transmit/
receive channels of the Keyboard parts and to
switch off MIDI transmission/reception of the
song parts.
Note: This field applies to both reception (RX) and
transmission (TX). The DisCover 5 indeed allows you to
set separate TX and RX channels for each part.
(7) On the page that appears now, select the sec-
tion whose parameters you wish to edit (left
side):
[Song]: This field restores the factory settings
for the DisCover 5’s song parts. It also switches
off the MIDI transmission and reception of the
Keyboard parts. You may not have noticed it so
far, but these are separate parts. Your
Refers to the Keyboard parts
Refers to the parts of the Song Player
Synchronization, general settings
DisCover 5 is indeed 20-part multitimbral.
[External≈Sequencer]: Prepares your DisCover 5
for use (and synchronization) with an external
sequencer. The MIDI transmission of the Key-
board parts is switched on (they do not receive
MIDI data), while the MIDI reception of the
song parts is also activated (they do not trans-
mit MIDI messages).
(8) Select what you want to edit (for Keyboard
and Song):
MIDI data transmission
MIDI data reception
If you press the [System] field (see step (7)), the
“MODE” options change:
All Parts [Local≈On]/[Local≈Off]: These settings
allow you to establish or remove the connec-
tion between the DisCover 5’s keyboard/Song
Player and the internal tone generator.
Synchronization with other devices
Overall MIDI settings
When set to [Local≈On] (default), playing on the
DisCover 5’s keyboard or playing back a song
will cause the corresponding notes to sound. If
you select [Local≈Off], the corresponding MIDI
messages are no longer sent to the internal
tone generator – but they are still transmitted
to the MIDI OUT port and hence to external
MIDI instruments.
(9) Use the [PREV] and [NEXT] buttons to select
the parameter you wish to edit, and set the
desired value with the [VALUE] dial.
Parameter fields can also be selected by press-
ing them.
(10)Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
Sound source
Sound source
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
LOCAL ON
LOCAL OFF
+SMF
+SMF
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Editing MIDI parameters
Editing Keyboard and Song parameters
The Keyboard and Song parts have the same and “Receive” and “Transmit” parameters, so we will discuss them
only once.
Note: The Low Limit cannot be set to a higher value
than the High Limit (and vice versa).
GReceive parameters
Note: Some instruments start at C–2 and end at G8
(instead of C–1 and G9). You may have to “add an
octave” to the value you see on the screen of your com-
puter or external sequencer.
❑
Data filters
The remaining three fields allow you to specify
whether the messages in question should be received
(ON) or not (OFF).
PC—Program Change and Bank Select (CC00, CC32)
messages. These messages are used to select Tones
and Drum Sets (as well as User Programs, see below).
“Bank Select” messages are in fact Control Change
messages, which were added when it became clear
that the maximum number of sounds selectable
using Program Change messages (128) was no longer
sufficient to access all sounds of a given instrument.
(The DisCover 5 boasts 1,422 sounds.)
Do not forget to send a Program Change message
after a Bank Select message because sending only
Bank Select messages does nothing whatsoever. The
correct order for sending these messages is (pay
attention to the CPT values):
❑
RX Monitor
These indicator icons (1~16) light whenever the
DisCover 5 receives MIDI data on the corresponding
channel. This may help you decide which channel
you need to assign to a given part.
❑
Part
Use this parameter to select the part you want to
edit. If you press MIDI [Keyboard], the options are:
Upper, Lower, M.Drums. If you press MIDI [Song], the
options are Track 1~Track 16. Always select the Part
before changing the remaining parameters on this
page.
1.1.0 Bank Select CC00 + value
1.1.1 Bank Select CC32 + value
1.1.2 Program Change
❑
Channel
(Off, 1~16, Off) Allows you to assign a MIDI receive
channel to the selected part. The default settings
usually work best, but you are most welcome to
change them. Select “Off” for a part that shouldn’t
receive MIDI data.
Note: Unless you have a very good reason to do other-
wise, we suggest you always select the same Transmit
and Receive channel numbers for a part.
Note: Assigning the same channel to two or more parts
is usually not a very good idea.
Note: For Song (SMF) parts, this also affects playback of
the Standard MIDI Files.
CC—These messages control parameters such as
modulation and pan. The function of a message is
determined by its control change (e.g. ID) number.
Here are some frequently used Control Changes that
can be filtered using this parameter: Modulation
(CC01), Volume (CC07), Expression (CC11), Pan(pot)
(CC10), Hold 1 (CC64), Reverb Send Level (CC91),
Chorus Send Level (CC93), RPN LSB, MSB (CC100/
101), Data Entry (CC06/38), NRPN LSB, MSB (CC98/
99).
Note: Though the DisCover 5’s keyboard does not gen-
erate Channel Aftertouch messages, the sound source
receives them (but they cannot be filtered).
❑
Shift
(–48~48) This parameter allows you to transpose the
received note messages before sending them to the
DisCover 5’s tone generator. You could change the
pitch of the received MIDI note messages if you are
used to playing a song (that is being received via
MIDI) in another key than the one the data were pro-
grammed in. The maximum possible transposition is
four octaves up (48) or down (–48). Each step repre-
sents a semitone.
PB—Allows you to specify whether or not Pitch Bend
messages should be received.
❑
Limit High/Limit Low
(C-~G9) “Limit High” and “Limit Low” allow you to
set the note range to be received. If not all note mes-
sages on the selected MIDI channel should be
received by the selected part, set the range to the
desired values. This may be necessary when control-
ling the DisCover 5 from a MIDI accordion that sends
the chord and bass notes on the same channel.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI
Note: Unless you have a very good reason to do other-
wise, we suggest you always select the same Transmit
and Receive channel numbers for a part.
GTransmit parameters
Note: Assigning the same channel to two or more parts
is usually not a very good idea.
❑
Shift
(–48~48) This parameter allows you to transpose the
note messages before they are transmitted to an
external MIDI instrument or computer. The maximum
possible transposition is four octaves up (48) or down
(–48). Each step represents a semitone.
❑
Data filters
The remaining three fields allow you to specify
whether the messages in question should be trans-
mitted (ON) or not (OFF).
❑
TX Monitor
These indicator icons (1~16) light whenever the
DisCover 5 (Keyboard, Song parts) transmits MIDI
data on the corresponding channel.
PC—Program Change and Bank Select (CC00, CC32)
messages. These messages are used to select Tones
and Drum Sets (as well as User Programs, see below).
See also the explanation for the “Receive” parameter
of the same name.
CC—These messages control parameters such as
modulation and pan. The function of a message is
determined by its control change (e.g. ID) number.
PB—Allows you to specify whether or not Pitch Bend
messages should be transmitted.
❑
Part
Use this parameter to select the part you want to
edit. If you press MIDI [Keyboard], the options are:
Upper, Lower, M.Drums. If you press MIDI [Song], the
options are Track 1~Track 16. Always select the Part
before changing the remaining parameters on this
page.
❑
Channel
(Off, 1~16, Off) Allows you to assign MIDI transmit
channel to the selected part. The default settings
usually work best, but you are most welcome to
change them. Select “Off” for a part that shouldn’t
transmit MIDI data.
Editing the System parameters
The following parameters apply to the DisCover 5 as a whole.
playback position, so that the slaved (synchronized)
drum machine, sequencer, etc., automatically jumps
to the correct position.
GSync parameters
Note: See your sequencer’s etc. manual to find out
whether it accepts Song Position Pointer messages.
❑
Receive: RX Sync
The RX Sync parameter allows you to specify
whether and how the Song player should be syn-
chronized to external sequencers or drum machines.
The available options are:
Internal—The Song player will follow its own inter-
nal tempo.
Auto—This is a function for remote control of song
playback (using a PK-5 dynamic MIDI pedal board,
for example). If the DisCover 5 receives a MIDI Start
message (FA), it waits for Clock messages. If those
Clock messages are not received (a PK-5, for
instance, doesn’t send them), the DisCover 5 starts
playback using its internal tempo. If, however, Clock
messages (F8) follow after the Start message, the
DisCover 5 uses the external tempo. You can never-
theless go on using the Song player without MIDI
Start/Clock messages, which is not possible when you
select “MIDI”.
❑
Transmit
The Transmit Sync parameters allow you to specify
whether or not the DisCover 5 should send MIDI
realtime messages whenever you start the song play-
back. Sending MIDI realtime (start, stop, clock) mes-
sages has the advantage that you can synchronize
external instruments or computers with your
DisCover 5.
Start/Stop/Cont—(On/Off) If you activate this
option, the DisCover 5 will only send start or stop
messages whenever you start (or stop) song play-
back. In this case, no Clock messages are sent.
Clock—(On/Off) This option means that the Song
player sends Clock messages (usual synchronization
method).
MIDI—Song playback can be started or stopped with
MIDI realtime messages (Start, Stop, Clock) coming
from an external clock source.
Remote—The Song player waits for a start message
to start playback at its own tempo. When it receives
a stop message, playback will stop.
Song Pos Pointer—(On/Off) If you select “ON”, the
Song player sends Song Position Pointer (SPP) mes-
sages. These messages are used to signal the current
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
User Prg PC Channel—(1~16, OFF) This parameter
allows you to specify the MIDI channel (1~16) on
which the DisCover 5 should send Program Change
messages whenever you select a User Program. If you
select a channel (1~16), such messages will be trans-
mitted on that channel. Select “OFF” if no Program
Changes should be transmitted.
GGlobal parameters
❑
Receive
Sys Exclusive—(On/Off) Use this parameter to spec-
ify whether (ON) or not (OFF) the DisCover 5 should
receive SysEx messages from other devices. See also
the explanation above.
User Prg PC Channel—(1~16, OFF) This parameter
allows you to specify the MIDI channel (1~16) whose
Program Change messages will be used for switching
User Programs on the DisCover 5. If you do not want
to receive them, select “OFF”.
Transpose—(On/Off) Use this parameter to specify
whether note messages received via MIDI should be
transposed according to the Transpose interval that
is currently in effect (manual setting, Singer Key, Glo-
bal).
❑
Transmit
Sys Exclusive—(On/Off) Use this parameter to spec-
ify whether (ON) or not (OFF) the DisCover 5 should
send SysEx messages. Such messages are not stan-
dardized, so that each manufacturer can use them ad
lib for temporary (or permanent) changes to the way
a part behaves. Changes to the effect processor set-
tings, for instance, are only possible via SysEx mes-
sages.
Such messages may slow down playback on external
MIDI instruments, or yield no effect at all, which is
why you have the option to stop them from being
transmitted in the first place.
MIDI Sets
MIDI Sets are memories for the settings you make in MIDI mode. The DisCover 5 has eight MIDI Set memories that
you can use to change your MIDI configuration. You can link a MIDI Set to a User Program (page 85), and specify
which MIDI Set should be loaded each time you switch on the DisCover 5 (see below). If you need to reset some or
all MIDI parameters to their default values, loading the Macro Settings (page 100) may be a wiser choice than
selecting a MIDI Set.
Writing a MIDI Set
(1) If you are still on one of the “MIDI Edit”
pages, press the [Back≈to≈MIDI] field.
If not, press the [MENU] button and the [MIDI]
field on the “Menu” display page.
(2) Press the [Memorize] field.
(3) Press the field that corresponds to the MIDI
Set where you wish to save your MIDI set-
tings ([1]~[8]).
(4) Press the [EXECUTE] field.
The display confirms that the settings have
been written to the selected memory and
returns to the “MIDI” page.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI
Selecting a MIDI Set
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(3) Press the [1]~[8] field that corresponds to the
MIDI Set you need.
The display changes to:
You can also select a Macro and work with
those settings, in which case all eight MIDI Set
indicator icons go dark.
(4) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
(2) Press the [MIDI] field.
The main page looks as follows when you work
with a MIDI Set:
MIDI Set selection at power-on
Whenever you switch on the DisCover 5, it automatically selects the appropriate Macro settings. But maybe you
prefer to be “operational” right away. In that case, tell the DisCover 5 which MIDI Set it should recall whenever
you switch it on:
(1) Press the [MENU] button.
(2) Press the [UTILITY] field. If the [Startup] field in
the left corner is not displayed in white, press
it.
The display changes to:
(3) Press the [Startup≈MIDI≈Set] field so that it is
displayed in white.
(4) Use the [VALUE] dial to select the MIDI Set to
be recalled (1~8).
If you don’t want any MIDI Set to be recalled,
select “Off”.
(5) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
13. Disk/Media functions
The DisCover 5’s Disk/Media functions allow you to save edited songs to disk or SmartMedia card, to save and load
your User Programs, MIDI Sets, and Song Chains, to format floppy disks and SmartMedia cards, to delete files, and
to copy disks and SmartMedia cards.
As a rule, it is wiser to work with a SmartMedia card. The DisCover 5 supports 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 128MB SmartMe-
dia cards. You can also use 2DD or 2HD floppies, but the most helpful functions (Song Finder, User Program Finder,
Chain function, automatic song links to User Programs) are only available for files on SmartMedia card. 2HD disks
have twice the capacity of 2DD disks, so use 2HDs whenever you can.
The how-to’s
(1) Press the [DISK÷MEDIA] button.
If you press the [UTILITY] field, the “TYPE”
options (and page layout) change:
Format disk or SmartMedia card
Copy one or several files
Copy an entire floppy disk
(5) Do one of the following (if necessary):
• For [LOAD] operations, press the field that con-
tains the name of the file you wish to load.
Use the [ø] [˚] fields if the desired file is not cur-
rently displayed.
The display changes to:
• For [SAVE] operations, enter a name for the file
you are about to save.
• For [DELETE] operations, select the file you wish
to dispose of.
• For [UTILITY] operations, see page 108.
(6) If available, press the [EXECUTE] field.
(7) Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
(2) Insert a SmartMedia card into the slot, or a
floppy disk into the drive.
page.
(3) Select the disk drive or SmartMedia card.
Floppy disk
SmartMedia card
(4) Select the function you need:
Load data from disk/SmartMedia
Save data to disk/SmartMedia
Delete files
Select another Type menu
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/Media functions
Load (from disk or SmartMedia)
The Load functions allow you to load User Program
or MIDI Sets. Songs and Song Chains can be loaded
via dedicated functions, which are explained else-
where (page 70, 76).
(3) Press the [EXECUTE] field to load the data.
GLoad MIDI Set
GLoad User Prg
This is where you can load MIDI Set “Sets”. These
are groups of 8 MIDI Sets that overwrite the
contents of all 8 internal MIDI Set memories.
This is where you can load User Program “sets”.
These are groups of 128 User Programs that are
always saved as a group.
(1) Select the disk drive or SmartMedia card.
(2) Press the field of the MIDI Set whose data
you wish to load.
(1) Select the disk drive or SmartMedia card.
(2) Press the field of the User Program Set whose
data you wish to load.
If the desired name is not displayed, use the [ø]
[˚] fields to scroll through the list.
Note: This function always replaces the contents of all
8 internal MIDI Set memories.
If the desired name is not displayed, use the [ø]
[˚] fields to scroll through the list.
(3) Press the [EXECUTE] field to load the data.
Note: This function always replaces the contents of all
128 internal User Program memories. Use the Finder
function if you only want to load one User Program
from a set file (page 82).
Save (to disk or SmartMedia)
In this manual and while designing the DisCover 5, we tried to make a clear distinction between “saving” and “writ-
ing/memorizing” data. The terms “write/memorize” are used to describe actions that cause certain settings to be
saved to an internal memory. “Save”, on the other hand refers to the act of copying internal memory settings to
disk or card.
Note: When saving files to floppy disk whose “AVAIL AREA”
size is smaller than the file(s) you wish to save, the DisCover 5
will stop operation and display “DISK ERROR”. Note that this
message does not necessarily mean that the disk is damaged.
In any case, please check the “AVAIL AREA” and “FILE SIZE”
values before saving files to disk.
If you pressed the [FLOPPY] field, the message
reads “SAME NAME ON DISK”.
• Press the [REPLACE] field to overwrite the old
version. —or—
• Press the [EXIT] button on the DisCover 5’s front
panel if you do not want to overwrite this file
and return to the “Save” page. Then enter a dif-
ferent name (or select a different media).
GImportant remark
If you select the floppy disk or SmartMedia card
that contains the original version of the file you
are about to save, the following message is dis-
played:
GSave User Prg (set)
This function allows you to save all 128 User
Programs as a set.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
The “File Size” value indicates the capacity
required to save the User Program Set to disk or
SmartMedia card, while “Free Disk Area” tells
you something about the remaining disk capac-
ity.
MIDI Sets, it is a good idea to make a backup
copy of your MIDI Sets in case someone else
starts fiddling around with your settings.
This function allows you to save all 8 MIDI Sets
as a set.
(1) Select the disk drive or SmartMedia card.
(1) Select the disk drive or SmartMedia card.
(2) Enter the name for the file.
(2) Enter the name for the file.
• Use the [ø] and [˚] fields to select the position
for which you wish to enter a new character.
• Use the alphanumeric keypad in the right cor-
ner to enter the desired characters. This keypad
works exactly like the keypad of a cellphone:
you may have to press an alphanumeric field
several times to select the desired character or
number.
See page 107.
Note: The DisCover 5 supports both upper- and lower-
case letters for file names. So choose whichever is more
convenient (or clear).
(3) Press the [EXECUTE] field to save the data.
GSave Song
• The [A/a] field allows you to switch between
uppercase and lowercase characters.
• The [Delete] field allows you to delete the
inverted character.
• Press [Space] to insert a blank (or the number
“0”).
• If you forgot to insert a character, use [ø] or [˚]
to select the position where the missing char-
acter should be inserted. Then press [Insert], fol-
lowed by the character you wish to insert.
Note: The DisCover 5 supports both upper- and lower-
case letters for file names. So choose whichever is more
convenient (or clear).
This page allows you to save the song that is
currently in the DisCover 5’s RAM memory to
SmartMedia card or floppy disk. Though you
cannot record new songs, there are four reasons
why you may want to use this function:
Note: The DisCover 5 allows you to use long file names,
but some windows are relatively short, so that only part
of the names can be displayed. We therefore suggest
using short file names (maximum 16 characters) when-
ever possible.
• to save the changes you made using the SONG
MAKEUP TOOLS buttons (see page 87 and fol-
lowing);
• to save the newly programmed MARK JUMP
locations (see page 69);
• to save a song under a different name;
• to prepare songs for use with the Singer Key
function (automatic transposition). See the
(3) Press the [EXECUTE] field to save the data.
Note: Saving User Program Sets may take in excess of
10 minutes (especially if the card already contains sev-
eral sets). This is due to the fact that the Database infor-
mation needs to be updated for User Program Finder
use. Do not switch off the DisCover 5 while this opera-
tion is in progress.
note on p. 29.
Note: The SONG MAKEUP and MARK JUMP settings can
only be read by the DisCover 5 and are thus of no use
to other sequencers or SMF players.
GSave MIDI Set
(1) Select the disk drive or SmartMedia card.
Select [SMART≈MEDIA] if you wish to take
advantage of the User Program Finder function
(page 82) and work with User Programs to
which song files have been linked (page 85).
(2) Enter the name for the file.
See page 107.
Note: The DisCover 5 supports both upper- and lower-
case letters for file names. So choose whichever is more
convenient (or clear).
After programming 8 MIDI Sets, you may find
that you need a few more and that you have to
make room for the new MIDI Sets. To do so
without losing the previously saved MIDI Sets,
you must save the “old” set to SmartMedia card
or disk. Even if you do not program more than 8
(3) Press the [EXECUTE] field to save the data.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/Media functions
Delete
Use these functions to delete the selected User Program set, MIDI Set “set” or song from SmartMedia card or floppy
disk.
The Delete function allows you to erase the selected
file, which may be necessary if the “Disk Full” or
“SmartMedia Full” message is displayed when you
try to save a file.
chain changes (loses one step), while a User Pro-
gram whose Link function you activated no longer
finds the required song.
(1) Select the disk drive or SmartMedia card.
(2) Select the file type to be deleted.
(3) Press the field of the file you want to delete.
If the desired name is not displayed, use the [ø]
[˚] fields to scroll through the list.
Carefully check whether you selected the right file
type using the fields in the left column, and the
right file via the fields in the middle.
Also note that User Program and MIDI Sets contain
128 or 8 different settings, which means that you
may lose a lot more than originally intended. And if
you delete a song that is used in a Song Chain, that
(4) Check again whether you really selected the
file you wanted to delete, then press
[EXECUTE] to delete the file.
Note: The Delete operation cannot be undone.
Disk/Media Utility functions
The Utility functions allow you to format floppy disks or SmartMedia cards, and to copy files or entire disks.
(1) Press the [DISK÷MEDIA] button.
(2) Press the [UTILITY] field, followed by the
The display changes to:
[Format], [FileCopy] or [DiskCopy] field.
Format
This function allows you to format the inserted floppy disk or SmartMedia card.
It would be a good idea to also format floppy disks
formatted for MS-DOS®, because that speeds up
data access. SmartMedia cards must always be for-
matted on the DisCover 5: during formatting, the
DisCover 5 indeed also creates a number of folders
where your various files will be stored. An MS-DOS-
formatted card might create problems.
SmartMedia: Remove the sticker (page 7).
(2) Insert the floppy disk into the drive, or the
SmartMedia card into the slot.
(3) Select the [Format] page (see above).
(4) On the display page that appears now, press
the [SMART≈MEDIA] or [FLOPPY] field.
The DisCover 5 provides two formatting options.
Note: Do not format the SmartMedia card supplied with
your DisCover 5. It would be a pity to lose all the precious
material it contains.
(1) Defeat the disk’s or SmartMedia card’s write
protection:
Floppy disk: Close the little “window” (page 6).
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
This obviously depends on whether you inserted
a floppy disk or a SmartMedia card.
The display now responds with:
(In the case of a floppy disk, the “SMART
MEDIA” will read “FLOPPY”, of course.)
(5) Press the field that corresponds to the type of
formatting you want to use (only for floppy
disks):
(6) Press the [YES] field to format your disk/card.
Press [NO] to return to the previous display
page without formatting.
[Quick≈Format] Choose this option to “initialize”
new (usually MS-DOS formatted) disks. This is a
lot quicker than the “Full” option.
If you press [YES], the clock icon of the selected
field ([Quick] or [Full]) indicates that the disk or
card is being formatted.
[Full≈Format] This option is only necessary for
disksyou used on platforms with a different
data and formatting structure. SmartMedia
cards can only be formatted in “Full” mode.
That’s why the display looks as follows:
(7) Wait for the “Complete” message to appear,
then select another Disk/Media function, or
press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
Copy functions
The DisCover 5 provides several copy functions that allow you to copy one or several files, or even entire disks.
Copying from disk to disk requires some “disk jockeying”. As a rule, we recommend copying all files you need for
your performances to a SmartMedia card. Cards are not only smaller, but they also hold a lot more data than
floppy disks.
[Floppy≈into≈SmartMedia≈(ALL≈Songs)] Before
pressing this field, please read the following
(the copy process starts as soon as you press
Copying files (FileCopy)
(1) Press the [DISK÷MEDIA] button.
(2) Press the [UTILITY] field, followed by the
this field, and no further actions are required).
[FileCopy] field.
This option allows you to copy all song files
(ending in “.MID”) from the currently inserted
floppy disk to the currently inserted Smart-
Media card. This is a quick way of transferring
songs you may have collected on floppy disks
over the years to your “concert” SmartMedia
card.
If your songs currently reside on your com-
puter’s hard disk, and if you have a device (pos-
sibly with a PCM/CIA or a floppy disk adapter)
that allows you to save data to a SmartMedia
card, you can also copy your songs using your
(3) Press the field that corresponds to the file
type you wish to copy:
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/Media functions
computer (rather than first transfer them to
floppy, and then from floppy to your SmartMe-
dia card).
WARNING: Copying files from a disk means
that the DisCover 5’s RAM memory is erased. If
you haven’t yet saved your last song to disk or
card, you should do so before proceeding.
If you then insert the card into the DisCover 5’s
slot, the following message appears:
[User≈Prg] Press this field to copy one or several
User Program Sets, then proceed with step (4).
Note: The DisCover 5 does not support User Programs
(or Performance Memory data) of other Roland instru-
ments.
[Song] Press this field to copy one or several
songs, then proceed with step (4).
[MIDI≈Set] Press this field to copy one or several
MIDI Set “sets”, then proceed with step (4).
Note: The DisCover 5 does not support MIDI Sets of
other Roland instruments.
It means that the DisCover 5 found files for
which no Song Finder information is available.
[SONG≈Chain] Press this field to copy one or
several Song Chain files, then proceed with step
(4). This only copies Chain files – not the songs
they refer to.
Note: The DisCover 5 does not support Song Chains of
other Roland instruments.
• Press [Update≈the≈DATABASE] to make the new
files “DisCover 5 savvy”.
Note: Depending on the number of songs you copied to
the SmartMedia card, this update may take some time.
But it’s worth it, so please be patient.
The display now changes to reflect your choice.
It works the same for all four file types, so we’ll
discuss the following only once.
• Press the [Skip≈DATABASE≈Updating] field if you
do not wish to update the database now. In
that case, however, such new “PC songs” are
“invisible” to the Finder.
Note: See your computer dealer for details about
adapters that can be used for SmartMedia cards.
Notes about copying files to a SmartMedia
card on your computer
The above procedure only works as expected if
the following conditions are met:
• You will need a SmartMedia reader/writer to
use a SmartMedia card on your PC.
• SmartMedia cards must be formatted by the
DisCover 5, so that all the required directories
are created for smooth operation.
• All song files (with the extension .MID or .KAR)
must be copied to the “Put New Songs Here”
folder on the card. Do not copy them to any
other folder you may see on the card.
• All User Programs files (with extension .UPG)
must be copied to the “Put New User Pro-
grams Here” folder on the card. Do not copy
them to any other folder you may see on the
card.
(4) Select the source (From) and the destination
(To).
Copy from → to
Press
Card → disk
From [SMART≈MEDIA] +
To [FLOPPY]
Disk → card
Card → card*
Disk → disk*
From [FLOPPY] +
To [SMART≈MEDIA]
From [SMART≈MEDIA] +
To [SMART≈MEDIA]
From [FLOPPY] + To [FLOPPY]
(*) These two operations require that you
change media during the copy operation, so
please prepare a second card or disk.
• Never copy several files by simply dragging the
folder they reside in to the card icon (open the
folder in question on your computer, and use
“Select All” to select all files, if necessary).
• Never ever erase any file from the SmartMedia
card, as this may damage the database file.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Note: Copying from SmartMedia card to floppy disk
often leads to the following error message and should
therefore be avoided. Remember that the DisCover 5 is
far more powerful when used with SmartMedia cards.
You are asked whether it is OK to overwrite all
files on the destination media (“To”) that have
the same file names as the files you are about
to copy.
(5) Press the fields of all files you wish to copy.
Selected fields are displayed on a white back-
ground.
• If the desired name is not displayed, use the [ø]
[˚] fields to scroll through the list.
• Press the Select [ALL] field to select all files of
the selected type (User Programs, Songs, MIDI
Sets, or Song Chains).
• Press the Select [NONE] field to cancel your file
selections. This then means that no files will be
copied.
Note: When copying files from media (SmartMedia/
floppy disk) to media, if the “AVAIL AREA” size is smaller
than the files you wish to copy, the DisCover 5 auto-
matically stops the operation without displaying a mes-
sage as soon as the media is full. Therefore, please check
the available disk capacity before proceeding. And be
sure to check the contents of the destination media
immediately after the copy operation.
(7) Press the [YES] field if it is OK to overwrite
files with the same names on the destination
media.
Press the [NO] field if files on the source
(“From”) media that have the same name as
existing files on the destination (“To”) media
should not be copied (only files with “original”
names will be copied in that case).
The data are copied and a “Complete” message
confirms the end of the operation.
If you copy from card → card, or disk → disk
(see the table above), the DisCover 5 copies the
first chunk of data to its RAM memory, and may
then ask you to insert the destination media:
(6) Press the [EXECUTE] field to start the copy
operation.
For card →card and disk →disk copies (see the
table), the DisCover 5 now asks you to insert
the source (“From”) media:
(There is a similar message for floppy disks.)
• Remove the original card or floppy from the
slot or drive and insert the one you wish to
copy the data to.
• Press [EXECUTE] again (or [ABORT] to halt the
copy operation).
The file(s) is/are now transferred from the
DisCover 5’s internal memory to the destination
media.
(There is a similar message for SmartMedia
cards.)
Note: If the display tells you “Can’t execute, song is
running”, you need to stop song playback. This message
means that the function cannot be executed because
that RAM memory is being used for song playback,
which is why it is impossible to copy files.
• If the “Insert SOURCE” message appears again,
return to the explanations under step (6) above.
• Enable the disk’s/card’s write protection and
press the [EXECUTE] field. (Press [ABORT] if you
do not want to proceed.)
To enable the write protection of a floppy disk,
open the “little window” (see p. 6).
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disk/Media functions
When all files are copied, the following message
appears:
(5) Press the big [Do≈It] field in the middle.
The display now responds with:
Note: Never remove the floppy disk or SmartMedia
unless the DisCover 5 tells you to do so. Always wait for
the above message to appear before returning to busi-
ness as usual.
(6) Slide the protect tab of the disk you wish to
copy in the Protect position and insert the
Copying floppy disks (DiskCopy)
floppy into the disk drive.
Note: It will be impossible to copy the desired floppy
disk if you do not write-protect it. In that case, the mes-
sage “Source Disk unprotected” appears and the display
returns to the above page.
You can also copy the entire contents of one
floppy disk to another disk (without specifying
the files manually). This function is not avail-
able for SmartMedia cards.
(7) Press the [EXECUTE] field to start the copy
operation.
WARNING: Copying files from a disk means
that the DisCover 5’s RAM memory is erased. If
you haven’t yet saved your last song to disk or
card, you should do so before proceeding.
(Press the [ABORT] field if you do not want to
copy the floppy disk after all.)
The display now shows a message to signal that
some (or all) data are being copied to the
DisCover 5’s RAM memory.
(1) Press the [DISK÷MEDIA] button.
(2) Press the [UTILITY] field, followed by the
[DiskCopy] field.
The display now responds with a warning
regarding copyright legislation.
Once the first data chunk has been loaded, fol-
lowing message appears:
It means that you are not allowed to make cop-
ies of copyrighted material for friends, col-
leagues, or anyone else.
(3) Press the [PROCEED] field to signal your
agreement.
(Press [ABORT] if you do not want to copy the
inserted floppy disk’s data after all.)
(4) On the page that appears now, press the
[DiskCopy] field.
(8) Remove the original floppy (the SOURCE disk)
from the drive and insert the one (DESTINA-
TION) you wish to copy the data to.
Note: Be careful to set the PROTECT tab of the Destina-
tion disk to the WRITE (or OFF) position.
Note: You need to use the same disk type as the one of
the Source disk. If that was a 2DD disk, insert a 2DD disk.
If the Source disk is a 2HD disk, use a 2HD disk.
(9) Press [EXECUTE] again.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
This time, the data in the DisCover 5’s RAM
memory are copied (saved) to the destination
disk. If all data were copied in one go, the
“Function complete” message appears and
you’re done. If only part of the data was loaded
from the source disk, the “Insert SOURCE
Protected Floppy Disk” message appears again.
In that case, go back to step (6) and continue
until the message “OK Function Complete” is
displayed.
(10)Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
There is no function for copying entire Smart-
Media cards. Use the [ALL] field to select all files
of a given type and copy them to your Smart-
Media card. See also page 109 for tips about
copying files from your computer’s hard disk to
SmartMedia. What you could do is: (a) copy the
contents of the “original” SmartMedia card to
your hard disk, and then (b) to another Smart-
Media card.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
14. Specifications
DisCover 5 Realtime Orchestrator
Other functions
Interactive DEMO
Tone Finder
Favorite Tone
Song Finder
Keyboard
Cover, Tones, Harmonizer
34 families (categories)
16, programmable
Up to 99,000 songs, managed
via database
61 keys, touch sensitive
Sound source
PCM samples
Max polyphony
Tones
Drum Sets
Multitimbral parts
Compatibility
Effects
Reverb
Chorus
Multi-FX
64 voices
1422 (20 Mbytes)
Next Song Reserve Yes
44 incl. ORIENTAL Drum Set
19
GM2/GS
Keyboard parts
Fade OUT/IN
Octave
Upper, Lower, MDrums
Programmable
–4~+4, separate for Upper,
Lower, MDrums
Automatic song transposition
(–6~+5)
8 types
8 types
47 types
Singer Key
Connections
MIDI
Outputs
Pedals
Display type & controls
1/4 VGA touch screen, backlit LCD
Contrast knob
In, Out, Thru
(L/mono, Right), Phones
Hold Footswitch, Footswitch
(programmable), Foot Pedal
(expression)
Panel controls
Alpha Dial Data/Tempo wheel,
D-Beam (with macro settings),
Bender/ Modulation lever, Mas-
ter Volume, Keyboard/Song Bal-
ance knob, MIC Gain knob, Voice
Level, Harmony Level, Effect
Level
Input
Harmonizer Microphone
Harmonizer Outputs Separate (L, R) or mixed to main
outputs
Video Output
Composite, independent Lyrics
transmission
Song playback
Realtime Song player
Mark/Jump
Others
Power Supply
Dimensions (mm)
Weight
Supplied accessories Owner’s Manual, power cord,
SmartMedia card (64MB)
100V - 117V – 230V – 240V
1184 (W) x 371 (D) x 127 (H) mm
12.5 kg
4 programmable locations
Song Makeup Tools 2 modes: Manual and Cover
(Macros: 30 ALL, 18 Drum, 24
Bass)
Text Import/Export, Text to lyrics
sync, Lyrics in display, Chord dis-
play
Lyrics
with data
Options
DR-10, DR-20
DP-2, DP-6, FS-5U Footswitches
RH-25, RG-50
EV-5, EV-7
Microphones
Minus One
User Programs
128, plus User Program Finder (realtime access to User
Programs on SmartMedia), User Program Hold (Tone,
Harmonizer)
Programmable
Headphones
Expression pedals
Keyboard amplifiers
Keyboard stand
KC-500/300/100
KS-12
Data storage
SmartMedia card
Floppy disk
4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128MB
FDD 3.5” 2HD/2DD
File types managed
SMF, User Programs, MIDI Sets,
Song Chain, .txt files
Note: Specifications are subject to change without prior
notice.
Vocal Harmonizer
4 presets
Talk, Voice-FX 12 presets, Auto
Tune, Singer (programmable)
Small (30 macros), Ensemble (30
macros)
2 harmony modes
Vocoder
24 macros
Voice Effects
Noise Gate, Compressor, Reverb
(9 types), Delay (9 types), pro-
grammable
Harmony Effects
Reverb (9 types), Delay (9 types),
Chorus (9 types), programmable
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
MIDI Implementation Chart
[Realtime Orchestrator]
Model: DisCover 5
Date: September 2002
Version: 1.00
Function...
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
19 parts
Upper= 4, Lower= 11,
M.Drums= 16, 1 logical part
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1~16
1~16, Off
1~16
1~16, Off
Default
Mode 3
Mode 3
Mode
Message
Altered
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
*****
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
*2
Note
Number
0~127
*****
0~127
0~127
True Voice
Note ON
Note OFF
O
X
O
X
Velocity
After
Touch
Key’s
Ch’s
X
X
O
O
Pitch Bend
O
*1
O
*1
0,32
1
6, 38
7
10
11
64
66
67
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
91
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Bank Select
Modulation
Data Entry
Volume
Panpot
Expression
Hold 1
Sostenuto
Soft
Filter Resonance
Release Time
Attack Time
Cutoff
Decay Time
Vibrato Rate
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
Effect 1 Depth
Effect 3 Depth
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
Control
Change
O
O (Reverb)
O (Chorus)
O
O
93
98, 99
100, 101
Program
Change
O
*****
O
0~127
Program Number 1~128
True #
System Exclusive
O
*1
O
*1
Song Position Pointer
Song Sel
Tune
O
X
X
O
X
X
System
Common
System
Real Time
Clock
Commands
O
O
*1
*1
O
O
All Sounds Off
X
X
O
X
O
X
O (120, 126, 127)
O (121)
O
O (123-125)
O
X
Reset All Controllers
Local On/Off
All Notes Off
Active Sense
Reset
Aux
Messages
*1
*1 O X is selectable
*2 Recognized as M=1 even if M≠1
Notes
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O:Yes
X: No
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Index
Copy
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Current Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
File
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 59 60 92
MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 102
A
Accomp Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Aftertouch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Alphabetic Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Arpeggio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Assign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 27
Asterisk (*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 100
Attack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Auto
,
,
,
,
,
83
Find only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
,
83
Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 60, 92
,
Finder
Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
,
Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
,
71
,
User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
D
,
,
92
70
D Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Damper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 110
Decay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 51 57
Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
,
41
Flanger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 94
,
Floppy
,
Harmony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Harmony Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 27
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Into SmartMedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
,
,
,
92
,
,
,
94
57
Multi-FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Vocal Harmonizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Time (Vibrato) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 61 62
Foot
,
,
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Free Disk Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Last Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Mark Jump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Song Chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Song Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
B
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Keyboard parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Song Makeup Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Frequency Hz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 65, 66, 67
,
From. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 61, 62
,
Bank Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 102
Bubble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
BWD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
,
Detuned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Disk, see Floppy
Disk/Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
DiskCopy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DJ Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
G
C
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Gender. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 63 64 66
Voice Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Genre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
,
62, 65, 66, 67
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
,
,
,
Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Celeste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
,
71
Drum
,
102
,
,
70
& Bass Mute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Mute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Drumming on the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Dynamics
59
MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 102
,
GS Reset Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Aftertouch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
H
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Chord
Hall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Harmonizer Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Harmony
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Oct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
E
Edit
Chord Intell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Chorus
Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 27
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
On/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Keyboard parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Song parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
User Program settings in SMF. . . . . . . . . . . 94
User Program settings in song . . . . . . . . . . 94
Drum instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Harmony Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 55, 58
Song Makeup Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Key Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
,
Hold
Fade In/Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Vocal Harmonizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chr
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Ensemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Envelope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Equalizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 62 65 66
,
,
92
67
Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Clear ALL Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Coarse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Concert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
I
,
,
,
Expression pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
External Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 71
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Initialize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 86
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Interval (transposition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
,
F
Fade In/Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fast-forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Favourite Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Control Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
,
14
,
102
J
Jump to 1st note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 88
,
Female . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 65
,
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Manual
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Vocal Harmonizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Remote. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Rename
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Song Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Song Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
K
Karaoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Keyboard
Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Sound Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Multi-FX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Music Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 55
,
101, 102
Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
,
Resonance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 60, 92
,
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Rev
L
Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
N
Large Hall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Reverb
Drum instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Layer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Next Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Normal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Note Wrap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
NRPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
LCD Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 14
,
LCD Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Level
Chorus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Reverb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
See also Volume
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Send. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 55
,
,
56
57
,
Song Makeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Vocal Harmonizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Rhythm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Rise Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
O
Octave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 42, 63
,
Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 85
,
Drum Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Harmony. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Song parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Vocoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Oriental Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
List ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
MIDI Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
User Program Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Voice FX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
,
,
62
Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 56
,
94
Rotary Slow/Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
RX
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Local On/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Key Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Pass Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Lyrics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
P
S
P&S Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Pan Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Save
Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
MIDI Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
User Program Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Without Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
PanPot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 91, 93
,
Harmonizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Keyboard parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Paper clip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Scale Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Scratch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
M
Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
,
102
M.Drums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1~4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 102
,
Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
PB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
,
,
102
102
Short Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Macro Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Makeup Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Male . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Singer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Voice type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
,
,
65
56
Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Mark Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Master Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MD player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Melody Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Memorize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
MIDI Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Performance Memory, see User Program
Pitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Small. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
SmartMedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
User Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
,
42, 101, 102
Drum Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Play & Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Play/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
,
,
94
73
SMF, see Song
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Smooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Soft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Program Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 102
,
Solo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 88
,
Put
Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
New Songs Here. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
,
,
102
102
Q
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 94
Quarter tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Quick (format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Set, Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Set, Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
User Program link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Finder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Link to User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Makeup Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Octave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Position Pointer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Tone Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
R
Random Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 61
Vibrato . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
,
,
,
66
,
62
92
MIDI Set
Automatic selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Link to User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Reflections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 58
Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 92
,
Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 93
,
Minus One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
,
,
43
65
Sostenuto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
,
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Sound Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Keyboard parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Sound EFX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Effect settings in SMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Effect settings in song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Select Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Set (save) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
SmartMedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 58
,
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
,
104
93
Stereo placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 91
,
,
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Studio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Sustain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Synchro (Lyrics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Sys Exclusive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Song/MIDI Set Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 85
,
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Transpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Disk/Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
V
T
Variation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Velocity
Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 43
,
Reverb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Song (Common) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Up/Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Song parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
,
,
,
,
93
Vibrato . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 60
,
92
63
61
Auto Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Singer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Voice-FX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Video Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Vinyl RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tone
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Select Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Vocal Harmonizer
Automatic effects settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tone Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Song parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Vocal Mixer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Transmit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Vocoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 62
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 66
,
64
Transpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
TT Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tune. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TV screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
,
,
Drum instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Keyboard parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 17, 31
,
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Song Makeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
TVF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 60, 92
TX Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
,
Type
W
Chorus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Reverb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Wall Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Write
U
MIDI Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
User Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Update the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 110
,
Upper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
M-FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
User Prg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 106
,
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
PANAMA
ITALY
ISRAEL
SINGAPORE
AFRICA
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Swee Lee Company
150 Sims Drive,
Sons Ltd.
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
NORWAY
PARAGUAY
LTD
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
JORDAN
Distribuidora De
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
Kontor Norge
AMMAN Trading Agency
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (021) 492-124
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
TAIWAN
TEL: 2273 0074
KUWAIT
ROLAND TAIWAN
POLAND
URUGUAY
Easa Husain Al-Yousifi
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
P. P. H. Brzostowicz
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
TEL: 243-6399
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
SOUTH AFRICA
LEBANON
That Other Music Shop
PORTUGAL
THAILAND
Chahine S.A.L.
(PTY) Ltd.
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
VENEZUELA
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
Cais Das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto
4050-465 PORTO
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
Musicland Digital C.A.
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
TEL: (01) 20-1441
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
PORTUGAL
TEL: (022) 608 00 60
QATAR
VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 285-8586
VIETNAM
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio
& Stores)
Saigon Music
138 Tran Quang Khai St.,
District 1
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
ROMANIA
P.O. Box 62,
Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
FBS LINES
Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 844-4068
Piata Libertatii 1,
RO-4200 Gheorghehi
TEL: (095) 169-5043
EUROPE
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
AUSTRIA
SAUDI ARABIA
RUSSIA
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
aDawliah Universal
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
MuTek
Electronics APL
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,
1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
ASIA
AUSTRALIA
BELGIUM/HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
SPAIN
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
CHINA
Roland Electronics
Beijing Xinghai Musical
de España, S. A.
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020
Barcelona, SPAIN
TEL: (93) 308 1000
Instruments Co., Ltd.
6 Huangmuchang Chao Yang
District, Beijing, CHINA
TEL: (010) 6774 7491
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
Center
DENMARK
SWEDEN
Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.
Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
Shanghai Xingtong Acoustics
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
Roland Corporation Ltd.
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
Equipment CO.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
New East Club Plaza, Shanghai,
CHINA
TEL: 3916 6200
TURKEY
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat
FRANCE
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
SWITZERLAND
ve ihracat Ltd Sti
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler
Pasaji No:74/20
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
Roland France SA
Roland (Switzerland) AG
HONG KONG
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
Musitronic AG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Gerberstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4410 Liestal, SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
U.A.E.
FINLAND
UKRAINE
Zak Electronics & Musical
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
TEL: 2415 0911
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
TIC-TAC
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
Mira Str. 19/108
INDIA
Lauttasaarentie 54 B
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
Fin-00201 Helsinki, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
GERMANY
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland Elektronische
NORTH AMERICA
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
TEL: (022) 493 9051
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
INDONESIA
CANADA
COSTA RICA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
TEL: (040) 52 60090
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 700139
JUAN Bansbach
(Head Office)
Instrumentos Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
GREECE
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: (061) 043-5400
MIDDLE EAST
KOREA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
CHILE
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
Comercial Fancy S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
HUNGARY
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
Intermusica Ltd.
TEL: (905) 362 9707
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
MALAYSIA
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2144-3333
TEL: 211 005
U. S. A.
EL SALVADOR
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
CYPRUS
OMNI MUSIC
IRELAND
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
Roland Ireland
Alameda Juan Pablo
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
,
Audio House, Belmont Court,
Donnybrook, Dublin 4.
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 2603501
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (323) 890 3700
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 66-9426
TEL: 262-0788
IRAN
MEXICO
MOCO, INC.
TEL: (02) 899 9801
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
TEL: (021) 285-4169
As of October 16, 2002 (Roland)
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R®
602153490.01
RES 358-02 Printed in Italy 11-02 DisCover 5 – OM/E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|